<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Freddy</id>
	<title>Adjutant Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Freddy"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Freddy"/>
	<updated>2026-04-28T01:18:21Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.31.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2026&amp;diff=5963</id>
		<title>Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes - 2026</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2026&amp;diff=5963"/>
		<updated>2026-02-24T13:18:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Below are the Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes for Calendar Year 2026.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://abiscorp.com/signup/release.html Sign up for automatic notifications when new versions are available.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==January==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==February==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2026-02-23:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202026\2602.B.pdf Release Notes-2602.B]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==March==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==April==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==May==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==June==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==July==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==August==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==September==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==October==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==November==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==December==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Release Notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2026&amp;diff=5962</id>
		<title>Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes - 2026</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2026&amp;diff=5962"/>
		<updated>2026-02-24T13:17:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: Created page with &amp;quot; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Below are the Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes for Calendar Year 2026.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  [http://abiscorp.com/signup/release.html Sign up for automatic notifications when new versions are a...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Below are the Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes for Calendar Year 2026.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://abiscorp.com/signup/release.html Sign up for automatic notifications when new versions are available.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==January==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==February==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2026-02-23:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2502.A.pdf Release Notes-2502.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==March==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==April==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==May==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==June==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==July==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==August==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==September==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==October==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==November==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==December==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Release Notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2025&amp;diff=5953</id>
		<title>Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes - 2025</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2025&amp;diff=5953"/>
		<updated>2025-12-08T14:29:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Below are the Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes for Calendar Year 2025.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://abiscorp.com/signup/release.html Sign up for automatic notifications when new versions are available.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==January==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==February==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-02-27:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2502.A.pdf Release Notes-2502.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==March==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==April==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==May==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-05-05:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2505.A.pdf Release Notes-2505.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==June==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==July==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-07-16:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2507.A.pdf Release Notes-2507.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==August==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==September==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-09-22:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2509.A.pdf Release Notes-2509.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==October==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==November==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*November release delayed to early December&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==December==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-12-08:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2511.B.pdf Release Notes-2511.B]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Release Notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=CID_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5952</id>
		<title>CID Setup Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=CID_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5952"/>
		<updated>2025-10-24T12:29:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Info==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CID Setup Options determine how Adjutant operates.  They are maintained in the [[ Company ID Maintenance |Company ID (CID) Maintenance]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They may also be changed through [[Screen Setup Options | Screen Setup Options]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup Options and Definitions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numbers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;45BOMCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require users to enter 1 or 3 when asked to continue to use raw material that is not on a BOM. If setup option 45BOMCHK is set and scanned coil is not on BOM, show confirm message with 3 = continue and anything else loops back to scan PWO line.       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;45CALCCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, system will compare qty to assemble vs qty open, and close line if &amp;gt;=.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46BOMCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require users to enter 1(y) or 2(n) when asked to continue to use raw material that is not on a BOM. If setup option 46BOMCHK is set and scanned coil is not on BOM, show confirm message with 3 = continue and anything else loops back to scan PWO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46REQFULL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then require 100% assignment of required BOM items before allowing assembly.  Works in Prompts 45 and 46.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46USEMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - During last step of prompt 46, when qty to use &amp;gt; qty on hand, the total qty on hand will be used when Enter or yes is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46SCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow entry of scrap after processing items made from coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;46SINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompt users to enter footage used on scanner after each line is completed. If enabled, process each pwo scan thru process (assume + entered each time)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;48LABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will print coil/coil-like tags for items assembled using Prompt 48.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;74ALLOCMATCH &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Validates loaded coil through 74/79 against SO Allocations and prevents loading if the lot# for the scanned P# is not already allocated to the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;74CHKPWONS &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents user from packing a non-stock production item using prompt 74 that has not been marked as produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79LOCATION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a prompt after scan outer carton to ask for carton location (prompt 79).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79LOCKSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the carton is locked to SO of the first item added to it (unable to add items from different SO). Only checked at the SO# line/ P# level. Loading cartons into cartons is not changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79NOTINSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, users will be stopped and will need to select &amp;#039;3&amp;#039; to continue after they scan a carton onto a shipping event when the linked sales order isn&amp;#039;t on the shipping event.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;79SHOWOPEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then show open carton/line count during 79 processing. If count = 0, then show All Items Packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;86MOVE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the logic for Prompt 86 so that it will only move a quantity of one at a time instead of the whole Production Work Order line. This option also updates the display in Prompt 86 to show the line&amp;#039;s Piece Mark and current quantity in the new station after a successful scan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCTMGRBYORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled display account manager from parent company only. Otherwise, display all contacts with account manager attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ACCTMGRREQONENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - AcctMgrReqOnEnt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDDATETOPROJOPPNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADDDATETOPROJOPPNO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDSUSPECT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, suspect screen is launched after save of new Org, adding suspect attribute to new Org. NOTE: Orgs created from other screens will not auto populate a suspect attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADDTODROPS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add 1 to all drops with higher drop by 1 on change of drop number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJ2.0&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADJ2.0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Accounts Payable module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Accounts Receivable module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJCCREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires an address and zip code to be entered before processing a credit card transaction.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJCCUSETOKEN &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to save an encrypted token instead of the full credit card data. Users must process a charge from the hand entered or swiped number. Once a charge is processed, the token will be received and saved to the customer. The token will be used in all future transactions for that credit card. The token is provided by Heartland Credit Card Processor and is only compatible with Heartland integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant General Ledger module is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Not in Use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ADJTRANSACTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ADJTRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AGEBYDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, agings are by due date, with new current column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ALLAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLOWOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the schedule conflict message received when assigning/scheduling a task that will overlap with an existing scheduled task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLOWTASKQUOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a &amp;quot;Quote&amp;quot; checkbox to task header.  If task is marked as quote, the material/labor items added to timesheet are not removed from inventory.  The quote can be converted to a live task by selecting a convert button.  During the conversion process, a list of items will display so the user can select which ones to bring over to the live task.  The selected items are removed from inventory and assigned to the task.  The unselected ones are deleted from the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALLRES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Post time to any resource on the Time and Material Entry screen (no assignments necessary).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALTPRINTBOX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Toggle between Getprinter and Printer Prompt type report form calls when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ALTPROBCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the description of the Standard Task used in the Task Entry Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Integration with an AMS roll former controller (Eclipse Software) is being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSADDCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then coil will be adjusted into the system to meet AMS demand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSADDSEIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates an Interplant Shipping Event during the assembly process from Connex usage if the Production Work Order (PWO) is an Interplant PWO and an Interplant Shipping Event doesn&amp;#039;t exist. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSANYCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allows Adjutant to accept and use whatever coil is scanned through AMS regardless of prod plant/whse on the sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBLANKIDQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Runs a query to fill out blank item_id values before the Adjamsprocess program converts the AMS usage data into Adjutant usage data. This query tries to match the usage data from AMS back to the original lines that were sent to AMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBLANKITEMID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option is used in AMS integration. If set,  will apply the usage of a line without an Item ID in the AMS Product table to the line with the last valid item ID. This is used to account for additional material run outside of a job sent by Adjutant against the most recent job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - AMSBUNDLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, move data from bundlecode to bundlecode2 in amsproduce table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSBUNDLESET2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to change layout of AMSBUNDLE user fields. Change layout of user fields to match new format (Pass Customer PO# to Eclipse in the User1 field, and pass the Job# to Eclipse).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSINC2D&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will take the final scrap coil signal from Connex (Type = 2, Reason = D) and zero out the used coil. This option will only work with the AMSBLANKITEMID option turned on. Scrapped coil usage will be applied to the last job that came in for that coil. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSORDERSQL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Directs OrderIN, BundleI, and coilin into the correct SQL tables instead of files. Eclipse will have to updated to read from these SQL datatables instead of the .del files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSPUNCHISP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use RCODE = P as leading punch question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, changes AMS process when running reclaim.  Works with setup of AMSSCRAP rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSEMACHNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to copy machine number to AMS_ORDERIN table during AMS process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER2PROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change values in orderin.del file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER5CUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change to use profile profile instead of ams profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMSUSER5SPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Insert Answers to configurable questions with rep code F and ST into user 5 field of AMS_ORDERIN table to allow visibilty on Eclipse software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AP20CHKNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new check number and manual check number fields in apchkacct table (16 characters).  Use as check number fields if AP20CHKNO setup option is enabled. Change screens to use 15 char numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APAGEPOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add POs linked to AP Invoice to polist field in cursor.  Only works in detail mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APAPRPPAYZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes 0 show up in grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCCVENDOR2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, AP Credit Card Vendors must use the APCCVENDOR Org Attribute, rather than the CCDATA attribute. The CCDATA attribute becomes exclusive for personal credit card data for sales. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHECK48&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows 48 invoices on a check without printing an overflow stub.  To use, APCHKOVERFLOW rule must be setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Text1 = Overflow message  (lc_overflowmessage)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Num1 = Number of checks on stub  (48)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log1 = Enabled (checked)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log2 = Print details.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If checked, and stub has &amp;gt;48 invocies, first 48 will print on stub, if not checked, stub will not have any details, just message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKPOCLEAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show a warning during AP Invoice entry if the PO Clearing account is used as a distribution line and the AP Invoice is not linked to a PO.           &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKVALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will then void all checks not used between first entered Check number and final used check number that are not live checks when the process completes in the event of a Check reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APCHKVENDORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then print checks in company order instead of vendno order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APDUPREFNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set check for duplicate ref# (checkno) on apnoncheck payment screen.  Warn if duplicate found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APEDITCTRLACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows edit of Control account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APEDITDDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows edit of due date and discount date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APKEEPDISTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will copy down line notes for distributions on an AP Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APMULTI1099&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to manage multiple 1099 types per single vendor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APOVERAPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the AP Approved to Pay amount to be set higher than the AP Invoice balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sends email to all people with pending approvals. Runs every 30 mins, 6am to 7pm M-F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPRAPREMITTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Generates separate approvals for both the Sold From and Remit To organization on AP invoices - provided the organizations have separate approvals set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPREMAILDEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls sending of emails through the approval screen. Enable to be able to decline in approval screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPREMAILOK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls sending of emails through the approval screen. Enable to be able to approve in approval screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APPRPOREMITTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Generates separate approvals for both the Sold From and Remit To organization on purchase orders - provided the organizations have separate approvals set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APREMITACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create setup option APREMITACCT to get Ctrl and Def accounts from RemitTO vendor instead of master vendor. Update and clear buttons changed to update remitto vendor if option set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APRETNOTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Make retainage use pretax numbers to figure retainage can only be used when POSPLITTAX is enabled also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APSEGACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a new dynamic AP Distribution account selector interface during AP entry. Users can select GL Account segments from a drop-down during the Add Distribution prompt. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APSKIPABACHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - APSKIPABACHECK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTOEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add Billable Check box to AP Dist tab,  create EXP material lines for lines marked as billable, and linked to projects. Use APTOEXP CID setup option to enable Billable Checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTOSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When the &amp;quot;billable&amp;quot; box is checked and the line is saved, pop up a window that allows the user to add the amount as a line item to a service order or sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;APTWOBALLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - APTWOBALLINES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARAGINGDBEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fields added to cursor in summary mode. Data is dumped to ADJ_DB_EXPORT.xls in Adj Root folder if ARAGINGDBEXP cid option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARCREDITDISC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calculates available discounts on invoices when applying a credit in the Apply Credits screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARFULLDISC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows the full discount offered in the Cash Receipt screen, regardless of what the paid amount is. Discount is calculated on balance if set, not paid amt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARNODEFPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Leaves the Post Mark Date blank (does not default to today when tabbed through).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARPASTDUEATTACH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will automatically attach the outstanding invoices to the email when from the AR Past Due Email screen. This will only work when Auto-Process (Single Report per Customer) is selected. The attached documents will be sent to the AR Contact. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATECR1ST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Alter the Customer Statement report to allow the Invoices to be sorted by the grouping with negative balances first and then positive balances. Will flag credits with sorter1 = &amp;#039;x&amp;#039;, this will move them up in the sort order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATEDELOCR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the &amp;quot;Exclude Credits&amp;quot; checkbox to only exclude Open Credit invoices. Other types of negative invoices, such as credits made from material returns, will still show up on the Statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ARSTATESKIPDEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will exclude deposit payment records from AR Statement report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASAUTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will make AR Statement auto processing use ASAUTO- attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASCFLAGBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Adjamsprocess to check asc_prodout.bndleprint to determine when to print bundle tags. A value of &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; will trigger the print command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASCPRINTCTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates the auto bundle tag printing logic to also print carton tags when printing bundle tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ASKALERT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKCARTCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks the user how many copies of a carton tag to print during the carton creation process in Prompt 74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASKEDITNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the Invoice Header note in the Approve/Edit Billing and Ship SO screens after creating the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ATCHECKCYCLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if the item being transferred/adjusted is currently being counted (not yet committed) in the same warehouse. If found, a message will display that the item is being counted and cannot be transferred or adjusted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AVAILRED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets available quantuty to be and red if enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOAPPLYCC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Apply CC credits to matching invoices during superbatch processing.  CC screen changed to save SO Keyno into CCLINK field.  Function looks for CCLINKS matching the current invoice, and applies them if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow Batch processing to be scheduled on autosch screen.  Setup rule to control which processes are ran  (Gen Batch, Print Inv, Post Batch). Change superbatch, printinv and postbatch to run without prompts when called from auto processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOIGNORELOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will ignore any shipping locks in place on sales orders when the nightly batch process runs to apply open credits against sales orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOPACKALSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, attaches the invoice packing list as well as documents in the invoice document vault to the email when Auto-Processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOPROMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then all of the AUTO-tags can be used, so documents can print, email, and fax if all three are enabled on org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOQUICKCART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates a carton with settings from QUICKCARTON whenever a shipping event is created. If AUTOQUICKCART is enabled, make default QuickCart when SE is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AUTOTRANSSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, Interplant production bundles will be automatically transferred to the linked Customer Shipping Event when the Interplant truck is unloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===B===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BACKUPALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Control backup of VouchList folder. BackupALL backup files on each refresh)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BACKUPONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Control backup of VouchList folder. Backup files when screen is loaded,don&amp;#039;t backup after each reload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECBANKASOF &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the bank balance from changing for transactions cleared in dates beyond the As Of date when running Bank Reconciliation in As Of mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECBPURGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a button that will allow the user to purge selected (cleared) items in bank reconciliation. The new button allows records to be purged at user convenience, rather than at the same time of clearing. This new Turning on this option will hide the &amp;quot;Purge Cleared&amp;quot; checkbox that purges and clears at the same time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECDUMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - To save keyno, type and amount of all checks, cashrec and adjs once a day when bankrec is loaded.  This data can be used to find the source of the floating book and bank balance issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECNEWBOOK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to switch between old and new book and bank logic (BANKRECNEWBOOK), default is old logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECNOSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option will sort the detailed Bank Rec Report by however the Check/Deposit/Adjustment grid is sorted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKCRECPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will use the Post Date of Journal Entries as the transaction date in bank reconciliation instead of the add date of the journal entry when transactions are &amp;quot;Added to Bank Rec&amp;quot; from the journal entry screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECPURGEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will flag cleared items to never appear in bank rec screen again. Setup option sets checkbox, which sets PURGEC = &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; in tables. PurgeC records are not loaded into grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BANKRECUPERGEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will flag cleared items to never appear in bank rec screen again. Setup option sets checkbox, which sets purgec = &amp;#039;y&amp;#039; in tables. PurgeC records are not loaded into grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BCCAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables logic that references the [[BCC AR Email | BCC AR Email]] rule to automatically BCC the specified email address when AR Invoices or Customer Statements are emailed from Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BCCSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Blind Carbon Copies the user on all emails sent out of Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOJC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Job Cost when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Sales Orders when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGAUTOSVR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates the matching WIP entries for Tasks (service orders) when an Invoicing batch is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BGREQPROJID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a Project ID to be entered before any shipped sales orders that are linked to a project can be invoiced. Only one Project may be invoiced at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BIGLOGO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays CID Logo in Full Screen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BILLINGNOTESREADONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - BILLINGNOTESREADONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BLANKESTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set the matching date to blank if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BLANKREQDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Set the matching date to blank if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLBYCARRIER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled split up BOLs by shipto/carrier.  If SE already has a linked FPO (pomast.sekyno), then fill out FPO PO number on new BOL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLBYCARTON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, make 1 BOL per top level carton. Flag Bol with carton (limits auto generation to 1 per carton).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCHECKCOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and cod amount &amp;gt;0, then Cashier or Company Check must be selected to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCONTPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change source of contact to Def Contact of Organization, or Default Contact of Project if BOLCONTPROJ is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLCONTSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and SO has a contact that has a phone number, then that contact will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLFROMSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Loads all line item descriptions and line item weights into Bill of Lading detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLLOCKDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the Bill of Lading date from being edited once the BOL has been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLLOCKPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Phase field on the BOL becomes locked to just phases of linked tasks (no free text).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLSTKFROMSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Loads stock line items from SO into BOL detail. Functionality is same as BOLFROMSO, but only loads stock items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLTPONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bill To address is only changed when &amp;quot;Third Party&amp;quot; Freight Terms are used. Without this option, &amp;quot;COLLECT&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;COD&amp;quot; are also included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOLWARNIFCLOSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add warning if Master SO is closed when BOL is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOM5DEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Input Mask on the qty fields to 99,999,999.99999, instead of based on Item DecQty fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BOMWARNDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Warns user during adding an item to a BOM if item is already on selected BOM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BS2GROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, add new Group filter checkbox list to the Bill Cycle Billing Statement screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUNBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the Connex Bundling use the &amp;quot;Bundle by Item&amp;quot; option by default rather than the &amp;quot;Bundle by Piece Mark&amp;quot; option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BUYOUTCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled will order the input items from the BOM, provided the configurable item (the one with the BOM attribute) has the BUYCONFIG item attribute.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===C===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CALCDRIVETIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically calculates driving distance from the Sales Order warehouse to the Ship To address per driving directions from Yahoo. Enabling this option will slow down order entry for new Ship To locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CALCSHIPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to enter freight and packing charges during the Sales Order shipping process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHRECINVSTAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the invoice status from the cash receipt customer&amp;#039;s soldto default SOTYPE defined invoice status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHRECSORTDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the sort of the Cash Receipt screen to be by Due Date, oldest to newest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHREQNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CASHREQNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHSKIPREF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows you to leave the Reference field blank when apply cash receipts in the Apply Cash Receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CASHSUMMARY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Allow printing of new Cash Summary report after cash receipt.  Report can be printed at any time if you know the cash key (cashrec.cashkey2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CATDBF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CATDBF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCALLOWCANCEL &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to cancel chip card reader transactions while processing from Adjutant. If disabled, user must cancel processing transactions from the chip reader device.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCAPPROVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to not block save of SO if using approvals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCBINSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled handles 99.99.xxx bins special (left pads 99 blocks to two chars each to make number sorts work correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCFILLBANKDEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will automatically fill out the Bank Deposit field when taking a Credit Card POS payment with a card type identifier (VI = Visa, MC = Mastercard, DC = Discover, AE = Amex) followed by the last 4 digits of the card number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCNITEINV2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to generate niteinv2 records after commits complete.  Records made for each item/loctid committed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCNODISCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Correct issue with batch out of balance if  fields not tabbed thru, and discount is used. If set, do not calc discount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTCHNGWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CCOUNTCHNGWHSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTNEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and increasing count of item, get cost from SI Tier if Serial/Lot, else OHF Avg, else ItemMaster.Avg. If no cost can be found, don&amp;#039;t allow commit for that item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCOUNTWHSECHNG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Without setup option, scanner will flag scans in otherwhse as invalid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CCTESTCARD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays a &amp;quot;Test Card&amp;quot; button on the Point of Sales (POS) screen when testing Heartland transactions. The Test Card button fills in dummy card data to allow you to process practice CC payments in the POS screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CFLASTUSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fills out the new &amp;#039;Last Used&amp;#039; column on the Coil Finder screen.  This date indicates the last time the coil was either assigned/unassigned to a Production Work Order, or shipped out on a Sales Order. If the setup option is disabled, the column will be blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CFSHOWTOTAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show total band, default is off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHANGEDISCACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables pop-up window on AP Invoice and Cash Receipt screen to allow user to change default discount given/taken GL account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKCP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Quickbuy to handle AddToQB records that are not linked to SOTran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKORDERINC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - For PO screen, and if enabled, force the OrdQty to be multiple of the the OHF orderinc value.  Only check if OrderInc is &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0, and if the PO qty is in stk units.  If not a multiple, reset to nearest multiple and alert user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, issues an alert that the contract dates overlap with an existing contract, but still allows users to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKPACKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Check entered qty vs system packqty. It Qty isnt a multiple, round to nearest multiple and notify user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then the profile from first item on the order where log6 in the dept rule is set is used as the master profile for the order, and a warning is shown each time an item is saved that has a profile that does not match the master. The change is made to both the RFQ and SO screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKQTYSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enable/disable check qty logic/nag box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKUNLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents a task from being unlocked if it is currently in billing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHECKWORKCAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add check for working calendar working days at least 60 days out at login if CHECKWORKCAL CID option enabled.  If no working days found, show messagebox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKTSKPOLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check open linked po and if record found, hide the complete button and display the Open Linked PO message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKTSKPOLNK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks for Linked Purchase Orders on Tasks and warns the user to receive and close the purchase order before completing the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CHKZEROPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Notifies user if item has $0 price and SO line is submitted to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEANSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CLEANSCRAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEANWORKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically deletes old files out of Adjutant&amp;#039;s &amp;quot;Working&amp;quot; folder once it is through with them. The working folder can be manually cleaned from within Adjutant by going to the Cleanup Temp Files screen (Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Cleanup Temp Files).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CLEARPOMSN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Clears the Project ID and Phase fields on the Purchase Order for each new line item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COGSSPLIT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then split FRT COGS into non frt item COGS accounts based on ratio of item wt to total wt. (assumes qty in lbs)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COGSSPLIT2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will reallocate frt cost back to other items COGS accounts by qty (lbs). Will also update new ppfrt fields in billtran and sotran with dollar amount reallocated. Disable COGSSPLIT1 if using COSGSPLIT2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILDROPMCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the mill coil will be used as the name of the drop folder instead of the adj lot number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILDROPPCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - COILDROPPCOIL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILLABELLOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add print button to display coil screen to print a one-off tag. Printed when COILLABELLOG CID option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILLABELX2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, default the copies on CoilReceipt screen to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROCESSLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, listbox is used for processor field. List comes from Orgs with PROCESSOR attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, coils must have color and gauge filled out in profile table. PWOs are grouped by GAUGE and COLOR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COILPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds filters for Width, Color, Material, and Gauge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COLORBUTTONSPOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On Generate Purchase Order screen, if enabled, make the Skip button yellow, the Exit button red, and the Add to QB, Open PO, and Order buttons green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COLORBYDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Color codes tasks by Department instead of by Priority. The Department Color Picker (Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Task Management &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Dept Color Picker) may be used to determine the color coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMNOPLAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Coded that to check every time a record needs to be written if that person has a plan, if not do not write their record to the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMSELLPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Commissions are based upon selling price; discounts from list are not factored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMMSOGRP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, selected SO Types will be accounted for when a Commission Plan is set up as &amp;quot;Earned On Invoice&amp;quot;. Without this option, SO Types are only checked when the plan is set up as &amp;quot;Earned On Order&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COMPPRINTIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Look for a new custom version of the Completed Service Order Form (CSVRIMAGEORD instead of CSVRORD). This custom version of the form allows users to print attachments from the Doc Vault with the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEX6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Used in addition to SMART6 and SMART6USAGE, will take additional usage records sent over by recent versions of Connex (as Tcode = 6 records) and will apply the additional footage against the line it was run against. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables bundling screen and logic with Connex integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXCOST6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will handle adjustments from Connex (tcode=6) just like a normal run.  This must be enabled for an adjustment (smartprod.tcode=6) to be able to complete production of a line and move the cost of the finished good to the sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXCTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables bundle tags with Connex integration. Labels print automatically once production is complete. Label printers are set to warehouse and machine in the AMSPRINTER rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXC2TAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables carton tags with Connex integration. Labels print automatically once production is complete. Label printers are set to warehouse and machine in the AMSPRINTER rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXNOSUBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will ignore subassembly lines in the Connex assembly process when assigning material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONNEXPOSTSCRAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will treat additional usage coming from Connex as scrap on the assigned coil for any line that has already been completed in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONFUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - User ID defaults into the Confirm To field on the Purchase Order Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CONSUMABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires non-stock items to be linked to an SO before receipt. Enforces several layers of control to prevent using inventory GL accounts for consumable items. (See ECR 21847 for details)                                                                                            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYATTRIBVAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and item is copied, all underlying tables will be copied also. Table list assroute, catalog, cwinfo, hazmat, profile, udq, wirerope, amsprod, bom, dotnote, varunit, itemstdcost&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, copy the RFQ doc vault files over to the SO docvault. Create new function to copy subfolders and files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COPYRFQDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, ask to copy docvault files from copy source RFQ to new RFQ.  Ask during save process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTEQUIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Equipment on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTHOU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - COSTHOU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTHOUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Hourly Labor on service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Labor on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTMATERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Material on service orders (turns checkbox on in Batch Creator).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;COSTSALARY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cost Salary Labor on service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CPARTBILLTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CPARTBILLTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CRALLACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CRALLACCT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CREATEUNPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the Create Unbilled PO Receipts option in the Batch Creator. This option should only be used if you are using a separate PO system in a 3rd Party accounting package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CREDITTOPLANT &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the Plant Location&amp;#039;s Cost/Revenue account segments based on the GL Group assigned to that location.  Any GL Group reflexes from the SO Type or the warehouse combined with item transaction categories (such as frozen digits, etc) will use the production plant to identify the warehouse GL group instead of the shipping location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CSOADDUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - when enabled will force any alerts created from a sales order to be sent out from the sales person on the order. The default without the setup option is the add user of the sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CUSTLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTOMPWO1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Created 2 forms from EXCEL samples. Created new Rule  PWOFORMS  (Text1 is DeptCode char(2), Text2  is report form name char(20).  Change PrintPWO logic to check this table.  If dept match is found, use new form.  Must have SINGLEPWO turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===D===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DATABLEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Runs as part of the Automain process. When set, will dump the results of the Income Statement and Balance Sheet reports into two different tables once an hour. This is to be used specifically with the Datablend software package for General Ledger reporting. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEFAULTLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Lot flag to checked on new inventory items in the Item Master.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEFTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Message Control screen to Print instead of Preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DELRDPUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When the option is enabled, Adjutant will remember and connect the RDP user license to the Adjutant license. When removing the User in Adjutant license, a new prompt will ask the user to also remove the RDP license. This will save users from requesting the RDP removal manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DEPTPROD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new logic to S2P to break up PWO by Guage/Color.  Process logic by department based on log4 flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIARSCSV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then attach xls file as csv file to emails and file saves generated from report set logic for diamond screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIAMONDNOLOCK &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will run diamond queries with READ UNCOMMITTED option enabled. This will allow users to reduce blocking or deadlocks when running large Diamond reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DIRITEMDET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - DIRITEMDET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DISABLECOPYBILLNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppresses the popup &amp;quot;Save to Billing Notes?&amp;quot; in web Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DOCLIMITCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - System will check the Credit Limit on Bill To screen when entering new task or sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DOCLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Documents in document vault are stored as links (paths on workstation or network) instead of embedded into SQL database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DRCOUNTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables shipto to auto-assign to DRs based on county.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUMPLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will dump out list of files in folder to z9... text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUMPTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - (ABIS-ONLY) If set then dump out the tax detail by jurisdiction and line level tax data to XLS files in the working folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DVOPENPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will directly open PDF instead of previewing (same as double click)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DVTSLOCAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the copy docvault files to c:\temp folder before loading in viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===E===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOCOMMENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOCOMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOIMAGE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ECOM-NOSOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ecom-NOSOC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EDITLINK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITPROJNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then the project note can be edited from the grid. The project is updated on lost focus on the note field in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EDITSTKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to edit the description of a stock item on a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMAILERROR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically emails error messages in Adjutant to tech support email address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMAILSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sends an email to a small woodland elf. Not really, it emails back to running user, or abistest@abiscorp.com if no running user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EMPPAYSPEC4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, adds 2 columns for Resid and Problem Code to the Resource Pay Hours Summary XLS report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT_COMPHACCTMGR_REQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENT_COMPHACCTMGR_REQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTCHKPHONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, checks the Organization Main Phone on any new Org during the add process and shows possible duplicates with a matched main phone number. This also checks the main phone for duplicates during the Add Ship To process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTCOUNTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, and the customer number is left blank on an add, the system uses the settings in the CUSTNO counter to generate the customer number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTHIDELOGO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENTHIDELOGO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTHIDEZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the Zone field invisible on the Org screen when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTOP1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows a warning if email is not filled out when adding a new customer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then require address1, city, state, zipcode and 10 digit phone number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENTUSEPERSON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ENTUSEPERSON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EPSINGLEEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Send a single email to multiple users instead of same email to each user (from auto-alert).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPENSENOBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, hide the &amp;quot;Billable&amp;quot; column on expense reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPGLGROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Copy Exp Report Desc to AP Invocie Descrip. Add logic to use GL Groups from resource to change Exp accts if EXPGLGROUP setup option is enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EXPORTAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPORTSMART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - EXPORTSMART&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXPRPTPOSTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use last date of exp report as invoice/post date if within CID posting window. If outside window, use today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;EXTMARGIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then launch new shared margin screen (between SO and RFQ)  Ask if pricing per lbs.  Based on answer show correct columns.  Pass new pricing info back into SO/RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===F===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FAXCOVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically send a Fax Cover Sheet when sending faxes from Adjutant (via a fax server or an internet fax system such as efax or greenfax).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCBYPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change FC to generate by Custno/ProjID if FCBYPROJ setup option is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCEXCLPLAID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checkbox checked, then exclude all paid invoices from FC generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCITEMINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FCITEMINT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FCNEWCOUNTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then, new FCINV counter will be used instead of base invoice counter. FCINV counter will be setup on first load of GENFC screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FILLBEAMSIZE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Added logic to MBSGRID to save the beam size to a configurable question named with beam size in description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FINDITEMMATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses &amp;quot;find near&amp;quot; logic when searching for items in Item Master, Sales Order, Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FIRSTLAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and in PEOPLE mode, make Company name Salutation + First + Last Name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FLATTENSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FLATTENSER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FRACCPAC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FRACCPAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FQTYPRI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On Purchase Orders, logic will use fqty to generate unit price even if purchase unit = costing unit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FTPLEPASSIVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the label engine FTP process to work in passive mode.  This can be useful if active FTP ports are blocked in the customer environment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===G===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;G2EDITDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to edit the production department for Production Work Orders in the Production Scheduler grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GENBATCHPOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks user if they want to post new batches after generating batches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GETCAPS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GETCAPS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GHOSTSCRIPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, GS checkbox  defaults to checked in Message Control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL,INTERCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GL,INTERCOMP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL_MULTICID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GL_MULTICID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLGENNEW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Runs one query per column in the financial report writer, then pulls row data out of the result set from this query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLKEEPDISTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will copy down line notes for distributions on a GL Journal Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLMAS500&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MAS 500 GL is being used. This setup option will also create a Journal Entry import file that may be imported to MAS 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLPOSTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - GLPOSTDATE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLRCURR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default selected period and year to current GL period and year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GLSHOWBOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will populate BOLNO and SONO fields with BOL# and SO# from BOL Generated Freight POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYCPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Bill To + Cust PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Project ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GRPSHIPBYSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Groups Invoices by Bill To + Ship To.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HASHPW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses new hashed password values (still in testing)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDECOLL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new security option to exclude collection notes from screen (type = &amp;quot;CL&amp;quot;) NOTES,COLLECTION (old) NOTES (S1-NEW).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDECOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hide Completed option on Schedule screen also hides the completed tasks for today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then user needs NOTES, ORG, or NOTES-S2 (old/new) to see any org that they are not the AccMgr for (except for the master org).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEOVERLAPCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - HIDEOVERLAPCHK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEPROJONQUICKTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Project section on QuickTask&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIDEVENDOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Removes the Vendor Code/Name from the Inventory Labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HIGHLITESTK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Highlights all of the stock items in the item list when searching for items in the Quote, Sales Order, Purchase Order, Bid PO and Item Master screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HISTORY1YEAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls fields on the SoldTo and BillTo screen to work off a rolling 12 month calendar rather than work off a 3 year history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option for the Skip Processing flag to prevent the invoice from being built in order to hold off invoicing until order has completely shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Marks all PO Receipts with the Hold flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HOLDWIPLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a new field for SO Line Link on the Material tab of Time Entry. This allows linking material lines on a task to a SO line. Format is XXXX:Y where XXXX is the SO Number and Y is the SO Line Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IAADJZEROLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allows adjusting inventory into a lot that has no qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IAREQDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If found, require department to adjust inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICNEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Scrap screen to use Cost Tiers if ICNEWCOST enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICNSTIER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create cost tiers for Non-Stock items when they are either received on a Purchase Order, or assembled on a Production Work Order. The setup option also updates the shipping process to check for a cost tier to use when shipping Non-Stock items, and it adds a new &amp;quot;NS&amp;quot; option to the Cost Tier and Cost Tier Usage tabs of the Item Master screen to view the Non-Stock cost tiers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICSEPBYOWNER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If CID option ICSEPBYOWNER is enabled, and item has MULTIOWNER attribute, then the cost by assembled part owner is captured in ITEMMOH,ITEMMOD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ICXFERAUTOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This will assign a system-generated lot number when the &amp;#039;New&amp;#039; checkbox is selected on the Transfers &amp;amp; Adjustments screen.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IDFRAC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This displays two new fields in Modificaiton Process that allows entering ID1/ID2 as a fraction.  The fraction will be converted to a decimal once the line is processed.  This is for items with &amp;#039;Track Length&amp;#039; selected in Item Master.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNORECRM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to show 4 box question screen (orig, credit, both, neither), then set ignorecrm flag based on questions. Add new ignorecrm field to billmast (y/n)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNOREDESKICON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the make all icons visible message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNORELESSONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and count diff is less than one, then do not make any inventory changes.  NOT make adjustments to coil when adjusted amount is less than 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IGNOREROOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - IGNOREROOR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMITEMCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require the Item Transaction Category in Item Master. The desired reflex is when adding a new item, ITEMCAT should be empty and require user to make an entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMDATE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the Material Planning tab of the Item Master screen from displaying dates if the demand line is linked to a phase without dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows unscheduled demand (stock items for PWO&amp;#039;s not yet generated) on the Material Planning tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMNOZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to remove zero qty on hand lots from lot tab  (They appear if WIP Qty&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0 right now). If set, remove onhand = 0 lots from Lot Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMSPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set will display the paint code and the coat information from the coil receipt data on the @ tab and the coil allocation grid from the sales order line item entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INCFREIGHT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Freight as a Line Item on Sales Order and Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INCPACKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Packing as a Line Item on Sales Order and Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INSERTMATDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts work date into material descriptions on timesheet material lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INSERTNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts work date and resource on timesheet invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVALTTERMS1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - INVALTTERMS1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVDATEBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to assign invoice date on batch screen instead of on shipment screen. If found, use new invdate field as source of invoice dates. If not found, disable field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVNSWHSELATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option updates the Non Stock Not Shipped Report Warehouse (WHSE) filter logic to better handle filtering transferred items that have been unloaded at the destination warehouse. This new option should be enabled for any customer that utilizes the interplant transfer features through the Shipping Events module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVORDER2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then sort by shipto + SO Header Keyno + line number  (puts items into SO order on invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVREMOVETS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, PO line items linked to a Task Time Entry will be removed from NSNS report. PO line items linked to a deleted Time Entry line will stay on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSEARCHOCTG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - INVSEARCHOCTG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSHOWTERMINFO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays the applicable discount amount if payment terms are met.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;INVSOABIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option allows printing the bin on invoice forms (expression on the form is &amp;#039;C_billtran.soabin&amp;#039;).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMDETUPSRV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ITEMDETUPSRV&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays item in item master when an exact match is entered, regardless if there are other items that may be a partial match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMMULTINOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change note screen to have 5 notes (SO, RFQ, PO, PWO and Inv)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ITEMSPECCHAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allow expanded character set in item codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===J===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JUMPSTREET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks the &amp;quot;Street Match&amp;quot; box by default on the Record Finder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELDEFPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, print coil tags to user&amp;#039;s default printer. Skip Whse Coil tag printer logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - New screen to allows setup of custom Inventory labels for Custom/Item pairs.  Change InvLabel generation points to use custom label if found (LABELDIFF CID option enables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LABELEXTFTP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LABELEXTFTP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASERCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows printing of laser coil tag labels from PO Receipt screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASERCOIL1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If this and LASERCOIL are on, only print 1 laser label for each coil (default is 2) from Coil Finder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASTPAYONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Cash process to just use billmast.lastpaydate as date filter for payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LASTTOUCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, show two new columns in the Earned tab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Last Touch - Add date of the newest note for the same customer (rtnotes.entid) that has a note owner (rtnotes.owner) that is the same as the person earning the commission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*LT Aged Days - The number of days between the add date of the note and the date the commission was earned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LE_TS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label Engine over TS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEADIMPMATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses matching logic to allow user to select possible match on the Lead Importer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEADUPCUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and custno in import file, matched import records will have custno updated with custno from file  (or unique varent if not unique custno)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LEAVESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the bundle screen will retain the last button sort order, rather than defaulting back to bundle + line# sort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITCARTON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables Top Level Carton security. If set, user must have security token TOPCART to create a top level carton. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITTOOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If enabled, the item search results on the Sales Order, Quote, Purchase Order, and Vendor Bid screens will only include items that have an OHF record for the warehouse selected on the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LIMITUPDATEONORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LIMITUPDATEONORG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LINKACCTBAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints Payments/Credits and current Balance on Adjutant invoice. If set and Attach Link is clicked, all linked coil drop folder files will be attached to email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LINKCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Attach linked coil documents to invoices from Message Control via the &amp;#039;Attach Linked&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKCOSTONSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, cost cannot be changed from screen, or via BOM change once line has been shipped (qtyshp&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0). Add logic to PO screen to respect Lock Flag, if set and SO line has been shipped, do not push cost back to SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks the transaction date as today&amp;#039;s date when entering materials in Time and Material entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOCKWTIMER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces the SOTIMER feature to set the WTIMER step to 9999 and prevents any future alert emails if the SO is fully shipped when the order was closed. This option is intended to prevent the accidental sending of emails when a closed SOTIMER order is reopened and still has alerts to process, which can cause customers to get alerts that may not be valid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOGPRINTERS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - LOGPRINTERS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOOKUPSHOWMASTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will highlight organizations that have SOLDTO or SOLDFROM as a parent attribute in the main organization and air-hammer searches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;LOTBYMSN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Auto-assigns the associated Project# on the purchase order as the LOT# during PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===M===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ManInvSpec1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the default settings of the print invoice screen to be the packing list, 2 copies, and print only checked only when manual shipping. All other instances of print invoices default the screen to standard settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MARKALLSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Marks all line items as selected when using the Manual Ship SO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will prevent users from loading quantities into a carton or shipping quantities that are not available in the putaway bin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHOUTTOIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and all inputs and outputs are the same unit, then adjust the yield to the sum off the inputs.  PWO Item needs new ADJUSTYIELD Item Attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATCHSOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only Solution Codes with the same starting number as the Standard Task may be used on the timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATPLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Lock checkbox on the Material tab of the Time Entry screen. The Lock checkbox is used to byprass the pricing program in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MATPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the user to change the price of material entered into Time and Material entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSADJDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will default radio button to start on second option &amp;quot;Save Adjutant Descriptions&amp;quot; in the MBS Match Up screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSAUTOSAVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add setup option to auto save MBS grid every 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSDEFPUNCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and an item has a punch configuration question (LEADING PUNCH or rcode = &amp;quot;P&amp;quot;), and the answer is blank in the MBS import file, and punch only has 1 answer, then use that as the punch for the imported SO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSDESCBYLOCTID &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows users to save a different MBS description per warehouse for a single item. This means that each location can have its own MBS cross reference description in a multi-location organization. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSFULLPUNCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then the MBS import will look at columns J-N on the imported spreadsheet for headings of &amp;#039;Int Punch 1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 2&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 3&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 4&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;Int Punch 5&amp;#039;.  If data is found in these columns it will be transferred to configuration questions that either match the column name (&amp;#039;Int Punch 1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Int Punch 2&amp;#039;, etc.) or have the following report codes:  &amp;#039;IP1&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP2&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP3&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;IP4&amp;#039; and/or &amp;#039;IP5&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSLOADJOB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, brings the MBS Job number on the generated excel (cell H20) file during the INI conversion process. During the BOM order creation, the system will put the MBS Job number into the Confirm To field of the Sales Order header.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSNOFQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, this prevents the purchase cost of an item from being increased by the configurable length, provided the length question does not have controlling quantity selected.  The MBS Import process sets the FQTY for all configuration questions, regardless of controlling quantity. This is an override to make the MBS Import use the controlling quantity flag when setting the FQTY.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSQW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - change MBS grid logic to read QW xls file format instead of MBS format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSREADHEADER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes MBS logic to read fields from a customized cover sheet of the imported spreadsheet. Fields in Column H above row 12 are stored if the corresponding row in column I has an &amp;#039;X&amp;#039; in it. These fields can be printed on a packing list (shipsoformcomp) and on production work orders (woformmulti) by adding the &amp;#039;a_mbsheader&amp;#039; field to the form.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSROOFSLOPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the item has a SOC question with rcode = &amp;quot;S&amp;quot;, then the value from column F is copied into the answer of the Roof Slope question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSSHIPTXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MBSSHIPTXT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows MBS Import to process SHIP.OUT files into XLS format. Enables the &amp;#039;Convert Ship Out&amp;#039; button in Acquire Excel Data screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSTOTWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works in conjunction with MBSWT setup option. If set, the weight in the MBS file is treated as a total line weight, and gets divided by the line qty to import a per unit weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MBSWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the weight from the MBS file is imported to the Sales Order unit weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MCMATCHTYPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only enable autocomplete if MCMATCHTYPE CID option enabled and file emailauotcomp.dbf in Adjutant folder. Trap for missing eamilautocomp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MCNOXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the XLS Export option in Message Control for environments without Microsoft Excel installed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILLASSESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Process items with MILLASSESS attribute like FRT items when COGSPLIT is enabled. Cost is reallocated to other items based on qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILLFROMPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts the PO vendor name into the Mill Name during coil receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MILTIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Military Time throughout the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MMEXPORTONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to autocheck &amp;#039;Export Only&amp;#039; box as a default on UPDATEMINMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODALLPONO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Pulls a list of Received POs from Receipt history for items in the Modification Processor and allow the PO filter to capture all Mod Add In items on that purchase order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBREAKFACTOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBREAKFACTOR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBYSTKONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, default the AllocbyQty radio button to be selected when screen opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODBYSTOCKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODBYSTOCKONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODDUMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Troubleshoot issues with new cost less than original cost when processing items in large groups.  Make changes to original cost logic when Check All button used.  Add option to dump out file to z9mod temp file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODMULTISLIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will prompt the user for the number of slits when they select the &amp;#039;Slit&amp;#039; button in Mod Processor.  This controls the number of outputs that are created in the bottom grid.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNODEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to disable Delete button on Mod Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppress printing of all labels from Mod Processor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNOLABELALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppress printing of all labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODNONSTK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, non stock items can be created by changing item code at bottom, otherwise non stock items cannot be created by changing item codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODRECALCFT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will recalculate the weight and cost of a new item in Modification Processor according to the LBS/Ft ratio of the new item if the new output item is a coil.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODSAMELOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically uses the existing lot number as the new lot number in the Modification Processor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MODTRANSACTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MODTRANSACTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MONDAYWEEK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to use Monday as start day of week.  Custom form need to be changed to reflect correct week days (add 1 to both dates).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MOVEPACK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, change prompts 74 &amp;amp; 79 to transfer stock items from current bin to new C99999 bin where C99999 is the carton the items are loaded into.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MOVEUSEASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the current location will be updated for any serialized asset used in the production of another item when the produced item (output) is sold to a task.  In order for this to work, the produced item has to be serialized as well. This will also work for individual serialized items that are issued to a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MPNOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then don&amp;#039;t set qtytouse,costtouser to max value on extra items when selected  (leave at zero)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSALLOWCBINS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows C-Bin cartons to display and be selected when manual shipping or project shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHECKBINQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then verify bin has qty to ship in it. If not, then stop shipping process. Only applies to stock items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHECKPACKED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for packed items before starting manual ship process, and stop shipping if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then check non stock items for needprod flag =&amp;#039;y&amp;#039; and no generated PWO. If found, stop shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if PO lines linked to SO lines have been received before shipping a sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSCHKPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks to see if production items have been completed before shipping a sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNAUTOTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically creates a Default phase and task when a new project is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNCONTRACTTAB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MSNCONTRACTTAB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNDROPNAME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the drop folders have the XXXXXX--YYYYYY where xxxxx is the ProidID or Proj Number based on NEWMSNNUM setting, and YYYYY is the project name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNDROPSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Used with MSNDROPNAME, replaces the double dash (--) with a single dash (-).         &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNHOLDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, hange OHF counter update logic to ignore SO and WO on hold.  Change SO screen to check hold status of linked project and update projhold as needed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNJCAPALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, this will display variances from AP invoices on the Job Cost report (processed by selecting the printer icon from the Job Cost tab of the Project Control screen.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLIMITJC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, access to the Project Job Cost tab is disabled unless project security token (MSN1) option VIEW JC TAB is enabled or unless user is admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLOADPHASEEXPAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, expand all branches in phase tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNLOCKPHASESTART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, enable a new Project S11 security token to control access to edit the Start Date on a phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNMULTITASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then show list of phases on task tab of project and allow selecting multiple ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNEWDATELOGIC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show the new Ship Date and PWO Due Date fields on the phases tab of project control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOCHILD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t ask if a phase is a child of selected phase when a new phase is being created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNODELTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - MSNNODELTASK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOENDDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, ending shipping date on Master tab is set to blank.  This date is used to create the ending date on the default phase when saved  (onsite date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNOSTARTDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then start with blank Project start and end dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Project Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASEMAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Summary report is grouped by Phase+CommCode+Item and custom report can be adjusted to show correct grouping.  If not set then phase is not used in grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASENOPAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t allow edit of phase start date to date in past unless original date is in past (to allow edit of existing phase). Do not allow create of new phase with past date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPHASESTATUS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then add Phase selection to Project Status rule, open up the Phase Status drop down in the Project Master Phases tab and add a Phase Status filter to the Project Grid and Project Review Report (used when run in Shipping Review-Phased mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNPICKPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, when creating an SO from a Project, the user will be prompted to pick a phase for the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNREQCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a customer to be entered before saving a new Project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNSPLITLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, Project Sales Order and Production tabs will load the last used view options, and will not automatically reload after lost focus on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNTASKTASKSORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the default sort on the task grid of the project task tab is by task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNTRANSDAYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show new transday field on Project Control. Trans days are calculated using drive time from project whse to main shipto using 10 hour drive days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNUPLINKEDSO1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, update linked SO load date with load date from associated project phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSNUSERWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use users default whse as shipping whse for generated SO.  CalcPlant Logic will set production plant based on Whse PP rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MSSHOWREADY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, opens a new &amp;quot;Ready Date&amp;quot; field in the Ship Sales Order (manual ship) screen.  The date entered is stored in the sotran table for on time delivery reporting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MTRCOPYDV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set this will copy any files from the Coil Doc Vault (visible by selecting the Lot# from the Lot tab of Item Master) to a COIL folder on the sales order and AR invoice.  If the AR is automatically printed, the contents of the COIL folder are printed along with the invoice.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTICID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - multicid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIMACHINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables users to assign, schedule and track the production not just by department, but by machine it is scheduled on. See ECR 36988. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIRATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY. Do not apply at customer sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MULTIROLLFORMER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows integration with multiple rollformer controllers concurrently. Users can send to Connex/Beck and AMS/Eclipse controllers as needed based on the item&amp;#039;s attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===N===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEW10DOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, uses new version of DocVault with new GDViewer v 10. (disable NEWDOCVAULT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOIL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOMM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWCOUNTYMBM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to use only ZIPMBMA table . Add missing fields to ZIPMBMA table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWDOCVAULT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWDOCVAULT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWEMAILOCX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new email1 program (email1new)  Call from email1 if NEWEMALOCX CID option enabled. Add new code to MessageControl (printnew), use if NEWEMAILOCX is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWITEMLOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, display first 500 items by item order if ? used in description field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWLOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWLOOKUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWLOOKUPADJ2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWLOOKUPADJ2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWMSNNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then map project drop folders to Project Number instead of Project ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWNOTESTOEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, new notes button will launch outlook mail with custno tag from the Org screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWPOREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the POREC screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the Message Control screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSEADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Newer logic for pulling the correct shipping event screen (SEADD2), will be auto added for new customers &amp;#039;&amp;#039;2015&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Newer shipping logic for shipping event screen, will be auto added for new customers &amp;#039;&amp;#039;2015&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSHIPEVENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Orders are linked to Shipping Events, but SO lines are not linked until truck is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSOSCREEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWSOSCREEN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSUBM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NEWSUBM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWSUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Converts the Organization Discount/Surcharge and retainage logic to a back-end process that better handles partial invoicing and retainage calculations at shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTASKSEQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Tasks are given a new SO sequence number (CID Counter) that is separate from the Sales Order counter. The counter is set up in the CID Maintenance screen, on the Counters tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Tax by order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWTEMPLATEIMAGE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows the Desktop and Adjutant 2020 platforms to use the same Document Vault folder location for storing image files used in Email Templates. The Doc Vaul Dropfolders (DROPFOLDERS) rule must be updated to include the new &amp;#039;EMAILTEMP&amp;#039; Doc Vault code and a valid folder path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NEWUSERSEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use the newest version of the user securty system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITECTAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NITECTAVG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NO501&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will suppress the 501 errors when sending mail from message control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOADDNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, do not process the addnote event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOADJINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adjutant Inventory module is not installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOALERT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOAP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOAVGCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOAVGCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOBREADCRUMBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, disable the breadcrumbs feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOBUYOUTSHEET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to allow skipping of Buyout sheet question&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOCOGS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If NOCOGS is enabled, and task is not billable, then ignore posting window for labor lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOCOGSLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Time Entries for resources with a Cost Factor will not create GL Postings for WIP or COGS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOGL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOGLINSTALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - General Ledger software is not installed; skips posting logic in batch generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOHEADERPLANTCHANGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Maintains the already set Production Plant on Quotes/Orders if user answers NO to questions for updating the Plant when changing the Ship Warehouse. Overrides the Production Plant Priority default reflexes when changing the Ship Warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inventory Module not installed in 3rd Party accounting system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLABELONASSEMBLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOLABELONASSEMBLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLISTBEST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then do not use list price as best price if list is &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0 and lower than price matrix (SO and RFQ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will change VOUCHLIST screen to not automaticlly display the first file in list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOLOTORIGIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOLOTORIGIN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOMATCHINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set will suppress invoices from being printed during nightly invoice processing, but allow other auto-processes to take place. Invoices will not be flagged as printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOOCTDISCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Coded to not include supplements in calculating the maximum amount.  Look for nooctdiscount cid rule which only USA uses to run through this code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPOCOILLOTCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to transfer ownership in the Transfers &amp;amp; Adjustments screen for lot controlled items staying in the same warehouse if POCOILLOTCHK is enabled. Bypasses the duplicate lot error in this specific instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPORECSUMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skip printing of PO Receipt Summary if enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPOSPREFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOPOSPREFIX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOPROFILE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOPUBLICPAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option not to allow public page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOREFRESH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - NOREFRESH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTEATTCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Includes the attachments from each note record&amp;#039;s Document Vault in the emails that get generated from the Note screen (when opened from Project Control).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTEEMAILALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Asks the user if they want to send an email for all notes for the project when the email button is clicked (when opened from Project Control).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTESDROP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Email Notes linking to use RTNOTES drop folder if setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===O===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OACCMGR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The account manager on the Sales Order may be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OAHSHOWALLSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Include Work Order type Sales Orders (tasks) in the Sales Order tab of the Organization Air Hammer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and all is selected as qty filter, 0 qty records will be added for all other matching stk items that are not in report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDASOF2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Limits the Inventory On Hand Rpt, when run in As-Of Mode, to only querying data according to the &amp;#039;Include Only&amp;#039; filters. Without this option, the report queries ALL data and then limits the outcome by the &amp;#039;Include Only&amp;#039; filters. This option can speed up the As-Of Mode by up to 50%. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDBINBYLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ONHANDBINBYLOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDINACTWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will enable a new &amp;quot;Include Inactive Warehouses&amp;quot; checkbox on the Inventory On Hand Report. If this is checked, this list of warehouses will show both active and inactive warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDRECDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the RECDATE expression on the Inventory on Hand Report cursor is populated with the oldest accounting date from itemact PR record. This applies to lot/serial and non-lot controlled inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDRECDATEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the RECDATEN expression on the Inventory on Hand Report cursor is populated with the most recent accounting date from itemact PR record. This applies to lot/serial and non-lot controlled inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDSOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then fill out new soalloc field with allocation info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONHANDVPART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, enables logic to use the &amp;quot;lastvpart&amp;quot; variable on the Inventory On Hand Report to show the vendor part number for the vendor to have last supplied the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONSHOWCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled shows the Processor PO# and the Adjutant PO# in the On Hand grid accessed from the Item Master screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONUSAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add setup option to check Usage box by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OPENPOSHOWUSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set and report is run in detail mode, qtyissue field has qty of item used on linked svrord line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OPWOLINKDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change default report name to match dept code for the OPENPWO report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORGPERSON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show a new dropdown (Organization/Person) If person selected, show new fiields (Firstname, lastname, MI, phone3, phone4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ORGTASKS_RESBYSKILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - ORGTASKS_RESBYSKILL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OVERREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows your receipt quantity to be more than your order quantity in PO Receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===P===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PAATTACHRFQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then attach RFQ PDF to system generated email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PEPSPALSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Include all projects where the contact is the project manager, the sales person or the account manager on the people air hammer projects tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFORCED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a project to be linked to a sales order before it can be submitted to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFSPWOBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Moves non serial/lot stock items from an inventory bin into the PWO Bin. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in probin, then move from probin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in only one bin (regardless of whether it is probin), then move from that bin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If qty exists in more than one bin, then ask user which bin(s) to move inventory from. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PFSPWOBINA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works like PFSPWOBIN, but always shows the bin list as long as there is at least one bin with the item in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PICKBOMNOCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, unchecks the show all uses box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PL=WOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to allow Prompt 45 and Prompt 45 to treat scanned PL code as wod.keyno&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PLAINTEXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Plaintext option (checkbox). Box is defaulted if PLAINTEXT cid option is set. For Message Control screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PLUSEBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use base cost as input to costing functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POADDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that will auto-add missing OHF record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Purchase Orders will be automatically closed if all quantities have been received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Lot numbers are automatically generated for lot controlled items during a PO Receipt. The lot number is generated from the LOTNO counter on the CID Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips over the Print PO screen when printing from the Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POAUTOPROCESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Vendor Bids are automatically processed (emailed, faxed, printed) when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POBLOCKLINKED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, do not ask to update linked non stock lines on PO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POBOAUTOPRINT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with POPRINTBO, this will automatically display Message Control to view the backorder report (bypasses having to select the Output button on the backorder report).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCALCCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POCALCCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKADDUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Stops the Purchase Order Receipt process if the user attempting the receipt is the same user that created the Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and new cost is different than PO cost or last rec cost by more than 10%, warn user upon receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHECKMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks the order quantity on the PO against the Max level in the OHF tab of the Item Master. If the order quantity plus the current on hand quantity exceeds the Max quantity, an alert will be given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show 2 new radio buttons on the Print PO screen for &amp;quot;Include Inbound Receipt&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Include Inbound Report&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCHKAPINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, any PO line that has been linked to an active AP Invoice will not allows edits to the line and will not allow the line to be returned, unless the linked AP Invoice is voided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCLEARPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will clear linked project information from the line items when copying Purchase Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Stocks coil inventory items in lbs and catches linear feet (as opposed to stocking in linear feet and catching lbs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLOTCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for duplicate coil lot numbers in same whse.  Do not allow receipt of duplicate lots, warn if modifcation will create duplicate lots with qty &amp;lt;&amp;gt; 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOILLOTCHKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to prevent duplicate lot numbers (any item, any whse).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POCOPYPODATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set,  put cursor into PO date when copy is started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PODISABLELCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PODISABLELCOUNT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POEDITSTKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POEDITSTKDESC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGENMATCHVENDOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled when using the Generate PO Grid from the sales order screen, if users change a vendor on one item, it will update all other items to that vendor if the item has that vendor set up in the C/V part tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POGENSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POGENSKIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POHIDEPRICEADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POHIDEPRICEADJ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POIGNORETAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ignores sales tax amount on purchase order receipts in regards to GL posting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POINSERTGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically inserts the Inventory Control account into the GL Acct field on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POINSERTTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Inserts the ordered item into the Materials section of Task Entry instead of directly onto the Time and Material Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POITEMBOXSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Eliminates the &amp;quot;List/Add/Reenter/Non&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLABELMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label counts default to quantity ordered on Print PO Labels screen. Defaults to 1 if not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLINEISLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Appends a dash and the line number onto the Lot# of an item with the PONOISLOTNO attribute. Change lot # gen logic to add- PO Line number if POLINEISLOT CID setup up is set and item has PONOISLOTNO attrib.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLINKPUSHCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow linking an already received Purchase Order line back to a Sales Order line to update the Sales Order line&amp;#039;s cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOCKGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks/disables the GL Acct field when a stock item is entered onto a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOCKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Locks/disables the Rec Whse field on Purchase Order line items. All lines will be received into the warehouse listed on the PO Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POLOTPROJPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If option is enabled, and item has PONOISLOTNO attribute, use PO-PROJ#-PHASE as lotnumber.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOISLOTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically assigns the PO# as the Lot # when receiving lot controlled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOTEMPLATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the template box is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONONSTOTS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents Non-Stock items on PO linked to a Task from being added to the Material tab of the Time Entry screen until they are received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PONOZEROCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then do not allow receipt of zero cost lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POPRINTALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Report option to PO receipt screen.   New PORECALLOC report only shows linked SO lines (linked to this PO receipt, and unlinked SO lines with matching items.  Items are sorted by estdate, with linked items first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POPRINTBO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Asks if you want to print the Backorder Report after receiving a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POQUALVEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allow selection of unqualified vendor, show message box and blank out vendor fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POQUOTEDCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Quoted Cost, instead of Last Cost, from vendor on all PO&amp;#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECCHGWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows you to change the receiving warehouse during a PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECFAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens the Quick PO Receipt screen when clicking the PO Receipt icon on the PO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECSHOWLAST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add last rec cost and last rec date fields to PO receipt (POREC) screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPCOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, paired with PORECUPSOCOST, the system will use the extcost from the linked PO line, rather than the per unit cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPCOST3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will allow SO line items that are linked to multiple PO lines to use the cost of the sum total of the PO&amp;#039;s line items cost. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPSOCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates the Sales Order line item cost for SO line items that are linked to PO lines (based upon cost on PO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORECUPSODESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates the Sales Order description for SO line items that are linked to PO lines (based upon item description on PO).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREMOVEPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, project and phase are blanked out on lost focus of SO/Svr Link if SO/Svr Link is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREQGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires that a GL account number be entered for every item on a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POREQTODAY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the Req Date on a PO to today&amp;#039;s date. The default is today plus three days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORETKILLASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, assets that are created upon PO receipt will be flagged as inactive if the PO receipt is returned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PORRNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set use Note from SOLDFROM Screen as PO Header note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSBANKFILL1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will automatically fill out the Bank Deposit number with the Post Date on the POS screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSELECTLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new checkbox to printPO screen to show new grid to select PO lines to print.  All selected by default, can be selected, unselected as needed.  Unselected lines are removed from printing cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWBECOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new becost field to PO/Bid PO. Field prints on PO/BID PO  (potran.becost and pobtran.becost are database fields).  becost on PO report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIGBID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIGBID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWCONFIGORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSHOWCONFIGORD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows an editable list price field on the PO line item tab as a reference. If changed, a prompt will ask if you would like to update the list price on the item master screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSHOWSHIPNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set show the custno (shipto id) field directly above the Ship Direct To name field on the PO Master tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSKIPLABELS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PO labels will not print on receipt of items when label engine is running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSKIPLABELSCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set skip printing labels during receipt of coils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSLAUNCHCC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will launch a credit card processing screen when &amp;#039;Credit Card&amp;#039; is selected in the POS screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSOALLOCATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allocate linked lines in SOALLOCATE table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSALLOWOVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then allow POS transaction for more; then open SO amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSOCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSOCUST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSPLITTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Split tax out on itemact record if POSPLITTAX is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSUBSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, display the Subcon Service checkbox on the Generate Purchase Orders For screen if called from a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSWITCHWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates all PO line items with new Receiving Warehouse when it is changed on the PO Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POSZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default cash payment amount to zero in Process Cash Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTAB1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, tabbing on the Serial/Lot Details tab of the PO Receipt Screen (New version) will always go from one serial to the next serial instead of across the rest of the fields per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTASKLINKCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then items received on a PO that is linked to a completed task will be populated on the materials tab of the time entry record for that task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTEMPWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new temp whse field to POREC screen.  If filled in, items are received into this whse, and then put on the next interplant SE as transfer items.  Items on SE transfers appear as on order to the TWhse, and allocated from the FWhse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POTGENSUBCON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the Generate Purchase Orders screen to show all vendors with the new SUBCONTRACTOR attribute in the vendor drop down instead of vendors from the vendor part tab of the line items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUPDATEDROUTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Delivery Route Shipping Events for back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUSERISBUYER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and user is a buyer, PO  will default with them  as buyer. fF POUSERISBUYER is set, PO cannot be saved with a blank buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POUSETAXFLAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, default taxable status matches ItemMaster Sales Tax Flag (resell flag is ignored).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;POWARNPURUNIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Alert user if Unit on PO &amp;lt;&amp;gt; Pur unit on item master.  CID option POWARNPURUNIT enables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PREFERDRAWING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and an item has the CUSTOMTRIM attribute, the Trim Drawing tool will automatically prompt/load before the Configuration (SOC) screen in Quotes and Sales Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Print Inventory Label screen will print the same labels as the Item Master Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTCOILLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and NOLABLESONASSEMBLY set, print coil tags anyway (Wireless production).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTCREDIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompts to print invoice form after creating open credit. If setup option is set, then use OPENCR counter to generate _OPENCR- invoice number (so they will be unique).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVCOILREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add all fields from coil tag to c_coilr cursor. Used on report just like soc fields. Added logic to PDF maker. Enabled with CID option PRINTINVCOILREC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVAUTOLOG &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- Adds logging into the Autolog table when using the &amp;quot;Auto Process&amp;quot; Check box on the Print Invoice screen. It will also export a list of invoice ranges to process into a .txt file into the Adjutant folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVNOZEROS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically selects the &amp;quot;Exclude Zero Dollar Lines&amp;quot; option on the Print Invoices screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVSKIPZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new Skip Zero Dollar invoice checkbox.  Skip printing zero dollar invoices if checked, mark as printed only.  Add setup option (PRINTINVSKIPZERO) to default the checkbox as checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTINVSPECDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add a small pageframe with date range and state field to Print Invoice screen.  Screen pops up when a button is pressed.  When active, the date range and state logic is used to selecte the invocies to print.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTPAUSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add delay between printing each invoice to keep them in the correct order in the printing queue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOBOTH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the Print SO screen to print both the Packing List and Sales Order by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOEXBL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PRINTSOEXBL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PRINTSOLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, change print invoice prompt to print statements.  If yes,  launch PRINTBS1, PRINTBS2 and BILLSUMMARY with current ORG and BILLCYCLE filled in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMTC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new printer button that only is visible if PRINTSTMT, PRINTC1STMT or PRINTC2STMT is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRINTSTMTC2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new printer button that only is visible if PRINTSTMT, PRINTC1STMT or PRINTC2STMT is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROCESSRT &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically runs calculations for run time without the need to manually run it from the Production Capacity screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODROP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Service to handle moving files from drop folders into sub folders; Add to FoxProcess service, make setup option to disable in docvault screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODROPCHANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Process to look at asset drop folders, and move CHANT files to correct asset folders, Continue testing, move into AdjItemDet service, run every 10 minutes. Option enabled per CID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJALLOCINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sets the &amp;quot;Allocate Inventory&amp;quot; option to be checked by default on the Project Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJAUTOSONUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically numbers sales orders generated from the Project. Project ID is used as first SO. A dash with a number starting at 01 will accompany future sales orders (PROJID)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJCLOSESOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJCLOSESOCLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJCOMPSOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJCOMPSOCLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJECTRESOURCE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the following logic on the timesheet_daily page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*1.  Gray out the client field and set the cursor to start in the project field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*2.  Change the Project field to be a drop-down with Project and Phase listed.  Limit the options to Projects that are linked to the Resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*3.  Automatically set the Resource to the logged in user and do not allow the user to change this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*4.  Automatically set the bill code according to the Project-Phase-Resource and do not allow the user to change this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJHELDFOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically generates a HeldFor record in the HOLDER rule for projects that are set to allocate inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJNEWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This is for customers who use project shipping but don&amp;#039;t have SHIPSOINV enabled.  This setup creates invoices when batches are generated.  If this is the way you are setup, you&amp;#039;ll want to enable this option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPDVMBSID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJOPPDVMBSID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PROJOPPNOTES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - projoppsp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJOPPWONLOSTTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - projoppwonlosttop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJTASKCRANE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, fill out quest1,quest2 and quest3/Quest4 with questions/answers from AFI system. Shows the answers to the three questions related to the AFI Crane app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROJTOSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The Project Name is used as the Ship To location name when generating a new Ship To from Project Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PROMPTTAXAPPLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Prompts the user with a Yes/No option to automatically apply a Tax Credit Invoice to the Invoice it was created from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRONOXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Disables the automatic sending of an attached XLS file for &amp;#039;Email&amp;#039; method notification alerts that normally include an XLS file.       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PSODEFCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default cash/check radio button to check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PUSHERROR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Finish web service to allow pushing of error log data to abis server. Enable with PUSHERROR CID Setup option.  Used in place of EMAILERROR option (did not work if email not fully setup). Change ErrorOne to use PUSHERROR option if setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO45COMMA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the system will move the auto assemble one logic after the PWO Line scan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWO45PM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show PM on prompt 45 scans as line #2 (on all screens where there is room).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOADDAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDATREC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically inserts received items into the Assigned Inventory section of a Production Work Order when a production SO line is linked to a PO line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDPROFILE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds fields from profile table to Print PWO cursor (If  PWOADDPROFILE CID option set).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOADDSTOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set,  insert dummy lines into cursor for pullfromstock lines and non production lines.  Lines will be sorted to bottom, and have g1 = &amp;#039;z&amp;#039; in cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCLIST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will update the sort and grouping functionality of the Production Work Order screen to allow allocated material to float to a section above the production lines. Qlot, Qqty and Qonhand fields will now show lot, allocated quantity and on hand quantities for allocated material on a production work order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will automatically allocate produced coil to the attached sales order from the PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOALLOCSPLIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, PWO forms will be able to be formatted to display PWO Input item details above PWO Output item details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOAUTOCONSIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, try to use consig items if not enough from correct owner avail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints the Bill of Material list for a production item on the Production Work Order form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMLIST4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOBOMLIST4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOBOMSORTBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and PWO is single based item, then the BOM list of codes will print in item order instead of BOM order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCHECKASSEMCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOCHECKASSEMCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCLOSEUNUSED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then close PWOs without any material assigned when closing linked Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCMPXBOM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOCMPXBOM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCOPYDV &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will pull attached documents to a coil tag, such as MTRs, and pull them through to assigned PWOs, assigned sales orders, and the following invoices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOCUTLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Build CutList during sub generation, and add back to PWO Header note. CID option PWOCUTLIST enables option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODATEIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change adddate of ItemTrack record to oldest add date of used lot controlled material.  CID option PWODATEIN enables change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODDREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will use Header ReqDate as the source for the PWO duedate calculations (system will still use existing rule setup, but will use ReqDate as the base not Load Date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWODELAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, send Deletes to AMS if PWO is deleted from AMS if non PWOSETBUNDLE system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOFLAGLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will print from the PWO Label program. If not set, will try to use the default inventory labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MATASS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then highlight a line green on the Production Schedule screen if ANY material has been assigned to that line on the work order. This replaces the default &amp;#039;Can Make&amp;#039; logic which highlights the line green if BOM raw material is available to make the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MULTIDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOG2MULTIDEPT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2MULTIPLANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows selection of more than one plant when processing list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2SDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then filter dates using PWO start date instead of due date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOG2SORTDD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then sort by DueDate+Dept by default on the Production Scheduler (SCHEDMASG2) screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOADWOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then lc_wolist will have a list of other PWO that have the same lots assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then disable edit of due date when in edit mode (allow edit during add mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then do not allow edit of qty for non build for stock PWO lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOLOCKWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, lock the whse and plant after the order is added. Do not allow access in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOMAKESUB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, subassemblies will be made regardless of the current stocking level.  When this is disabled, the subassembly work order is only created if there isn&amp;#039;t enough currently available.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOMATCHYIELD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that makes the ORIG qty on BuildForStk PWOs match the Default Yielded Qty from the BOM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONEWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Recalc avgcost for SOTRAN based on assembled cost/qty and shipped costqty. Add logic to Wireless Assembly, and PWO Disassembly. CID Setup option PWONEWCOST enables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONEWCOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Updates Production cost for all like items on same PWO (Same logic, Unshipped PWO cost / Unshipped Assem Qty used to find Unshipped Produced cost, then apply to all like lines (by item code). Test new costassembly logic using wireless terminals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOAUTONON&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, it disables the auto assign buttons on the Non S/L tab and the All Non S/L tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOCHKPARTIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Unchecks the Warn on Partial Allocation checkbox by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOCTN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with PWOCUTLIST, CID option will stop pushing to note  (unable to update note if PWOs are changed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONONSNEG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents you from allocating more material to a work order than you have available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOPRINTRESET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to stop resetting PWO printed flag on RevNumer Change of SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOTE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When turned on will pass the Paint Code and Coat information from the coil used in production to the Pnote of the finished good. The information appends to the Pnote, in the case that there is already something in the Pnote field. If more than one coil is being used, the information will be passed through for each coil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONOWTUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the PWO assembly weight from updating the unit weight already stored in the sales order line.  This should only be used if customer is using weight values imported from MBS, or otherwise manually maintained in the sales order record. This works with both desktop production and terminal/scanner production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWONSFROMPLANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, this will use the plant&amp;#039;s non-stock account during the invoicing process (instead of the shipping warehouse&amp;#039;s non-stock account). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOONLYONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then production from a SO will be put on one PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPOSSWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOPOSSWT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPRINTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - See TSPRINTING.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOPRINTIMAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the the SO drop folder is checked for a JPG or PDF that matches the department name.  If found, then it is printed as a second document after the PWO.  If PDF then the image conversion tool must be installed on all workstations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOQDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set will prompt the user  to select a reason for the difference when assigning material during production, if the quantity assigned/used is not equal to the quantity required in the BOM (=/- 1 foot). The reasons are a set drop down list managed in the [[PWOQDIFF Rule | PWOQDIFF rule]]. The answers given are stored in the WOUSAGE table for reporting and reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOQTYONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Rewrite the task description (of the linked task) and update the task qty if the qty is changed on the SO and then resubmitted to production. Update Task descriptions on Resubmit to Production if PWOQTYONTASK enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORCODEAONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then answer of A rcode question from SOC for item starting route is added to start of task. Example: If Team A is the ans to question with RCode of A, the task will be Team A: Rest of Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORECALCAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Attempts to calculate Avg Cost for produced goods based on stock units, where not being made in stock unit. Sets a more realistic AvgCost for panels, etc. Rather than showing an average cost based on each, it builds an average cost based on the stock unit (usually feet).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREOPEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add buttons to reopen header and lines (UnComplete).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then all assignments must be assigned on the PWO for production be to completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQCERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires all production items to be certified before being assembled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOREQINPUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and PWO does not have any assigned input, do not allow assembly of line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORESETREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then reset serial/lot req to actual BOM qty in cases where bom item is only assigned to PWO once (single lot/serial)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWORESQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, pop up grid to verify which resource assembled each yield.  If only one resource assigned to line item task(s), then auto-populate resource field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the input&amp;#039;s lot# as the yield&amp;#039;s lot#.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNOU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change RebuildWOBOM logic to handle split lots instead of split serials; Add new setup option PWOSAMELOTNOU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAMELOTNOU2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to assign counters just based on lot, not item + lot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAVEPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and print only is used, save PDF version of PWO into Project doc vault if linked to project, else save to SO docvault.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSAVEPRINTER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOSAVEPRINTER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSELECTSM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, single or multi status is pulled from PWOFORMS rule (log1 = SIngle, Log2 = Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSEPARATELIKEITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Separates all items on the Assign Inventory tabs. Default logic will group same items together if there are separate records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSETBUNDLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Create new screen to allow splitting AMS lines by bundle.  Allow auto split on Line#, PMark, Item and Profile. Allow manual split and combine as wanted. Check for bundles over pcs count and lbs count on save. Check for unbundled/over bundled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSOORDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Orders the Production Work Order form in the same order as the Sales Order. Default logic will sort the PWO by item code and then by length descending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSTOCKPM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows using the Auto-Assign function on a work order to assign the current OH of an input provided it meets the threshold defined in the PWOSTOCKPM rule.  The num1 field of the PWOSTOCKPM rule defines this threshold.  For example, if the num1 value is &amp;#039;5&amp;#039; that will allow auto-assign to work if you have 95% of the needed quantity on hand.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOSWAPSERIALUK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to swap serial to _UK at assembly point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTASKDESC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to change task descrip to first 50 characters of item description of first line on the PWO (Last 10 chars is same logic from PWOQTYONTASK).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTOA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - PWOTOA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOTRANSCONSIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically transfers consignment inventory to the default Owner when the inventory is first used in production. It will also transfer amounts from the consignment PO clearing account to the default Owner&amp;#039;s PO clearing account.  This works with production from the Production Work Order Master, Prompt 45, Prompt 46, Prompt 48, and Connex.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOUPDATESOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and WO is linked to SO and qty changes, will ask to update/Add items to SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWOYESCHKPARTIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check the warn on partial allocation box, and disable the checkbox. Add logging to UserTrace when Continue assembly message is shown, and user selects yes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PWSWITCHWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - POSWITCHWHSE setup option suppresses the intial prompt, but did not suppress the results message.  Change to suppress results if PWSWITCHWHSE is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Q===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QADDQCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses base cost as quoted cost if adding an item on Basics tab. Uses today as quote date, and today + 90 days as quote expiration date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBADDSOBUYOUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, force in non stock items that have not been purchased yet into quckbuy screen.  Each SO Line item is a line on the quickbuy grid.  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Be careful when activating this.  When it&amp;#039;s activated it will add any non-stock item on a sales order that hasn&amp;#039;t been purchased yet to Quick Buy, but deactivating the setup option doesn&amp;#039;t clear these items from Quick Buy.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBADDTOPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow selection of existing PO when generating actual PO (not bids).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBAUDITQCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logging to boxlog when cost is changed in grid, and when PO cost &amp;lt;&amp;gt; system calc cost when generating PO.  PO cost audit enabled with setup option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBBACKOUTAQB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically removes QB lines created from the Min/Max reflexes when a matching QB line is created from the Add to Quick Buy function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBCHECKONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If selected, the Quick Buy report will only print for items currently selected in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBCUSTOMRRQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBCUSTOMRRQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBGRPPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then group PWOs by dept when generating in QB Make(will only ask for 1 due date, all will have that due date)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBNOPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Roll unsubmitted PWO inputs and outputs into QB onorder and allocated numbers. (Requires date range to be entered on other filters tab)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBPICKTRANSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will allow user to choose the Shipping Event to add the stock item on the Quick Buy screen when using Transfer mode. When hitting the Generate button, it shows a grid of upcoming Shipping events, up to 60 days out, to the receiving location. The grid shows columns for the SE Number, cut off and load dates from the shipping events, as well as current and estimated weights on the shipping events.  The Shipping Event is a drillable field in the grid and can be accessed from the grid. The item(s) will be added to the selected Shipping Event. Estimated weights are recalculated when the grid is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBPROJASCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBPROJASCUST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSHOWALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new OnHandALL and Usage1-5 All columns.  Enable with QBSHOWALL option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSOXPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - QBSOXPO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBSPLITTRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -- If set, then any item can be selected in Quick Buy when processing transfers, regardless of the source warehouse&amp;#039;s stocking levels.  A separate interplant shipping event (with a type of &amp;#039;PO&amp;#039;) will be created for any items where the source warehouse doesn&amp;#039;t have a sufficient AVAIL quantity to fill the transfer request.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QBUNSCHED&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, checkbox set to pull in unscheduled allocations/onorder numbers when limiting by date range in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QSUPHIDE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, hide contact, contract and status fields from Quick Task screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QSUPNOTASKPFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to exclude Standard Task code from Task title when created from Quick Support screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTNOSHOWCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to suppress task complete popup. Don&amp;#039;t blank out date after save. Refresh Daily View Screen if active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTREQPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to Make Project Required. Quick Time Entry already has option (QTREQPROJ). Added to Quick Support II&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QTYONTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enbabled, then display quantity fields on Task Entry screen.  Otherwise, hide quantity fields and remove from tab order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QUICKADDITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Default to Basics tab on Item Master when adding item on&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===R===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REBUILDCONN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - REBUILDCONN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RECALCLEAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Recalculates the Vendor Lead Time on PO Receipts according to value entered in LEADRECALC rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RECALCLEADMAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Screen appears after PO receipt showing old lead time and new lead time for each item on PO. User has option to select which items to update lead times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REDIRECTCART&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - E-Commerce: Redirect to Shopping Cart after adding item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REDIRECTHOME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - E-Commerce: Redirect to Home after adding item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REMITTERMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, terms come from remitto, not po during ap invoice generation using a PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Primarily used in water districts. Reprice base, if you change base cost and it is not a misc item, it asks if you would like to reprice open service orders that are not tied to a PO using new base costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPRICESPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, task repricing process will use the sprice unit, rather than the default unit value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REPRINTC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then prompt 71 will always reprint carton label (not bundle label).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQCOMPSVRORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Completed Service Order to Bill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQCONTRACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Contract on Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQDEPT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Department for Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQMETER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Meter on Time Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Notes before time entry may be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQPRIORITYRFQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces the user to select a Priority on the Quote header before converting the quote to a SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQPROBCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Standard Task on Task Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQRESOURCE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, requires a resource to be specfied in Task Assignment area before the Task can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQSHIPVIASO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require ShipVia on Sales Order before continuing to Line Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQSOLCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, all time entries need solution codes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REQWORKCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require Work Category on Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESCOSTTOGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Creates COGS entry for resource cost factor when a timesheet entry is billed. If set, make billtran cost = resource costfactor, if not set, make billtran cost = 0 for resource lines. Cost will post to COGS and Wip Acct of labor Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETAPPR1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then approvals are not reset unless terms or ordamt changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETHEATNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, blank out HeatNo on each new receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESETMILLCOIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will reset the mill coil number to blank on each PO receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RESNOSQAUDSCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RESNOSQAUDSCH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;REVPROJWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will force the COGS and Revenue GL Distributions to be based on the Warehouse selected on the project header screen when using projects. This will allow multi-site projects with production and purchasing costs to go to the warehouse named on the project header rather than the producing or purchasing warehouses. The general ledger will follow the standard routing for the project header warehouse based on GL Groups. All material will flow through the purchasing and producing Stock, non stock and WIP accounts as usual. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This change allows all Cost and Revenue to go to the main project warehouse rather than to the other sites that may produce or purchase for the main project warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQALLOCREADONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Lot Allocation screen will appear in read only mode if it is called from the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQALLOWLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds button to quote screen to Lock quote. Anyone can lock, takes special security token to unlock (RFQ: Unlock (s10))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQBULKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, allow editing Quote Line Item prices using the &amp;#039;New Price&amp;#039; field on the Line Item View tab of the Quote screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQBYITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to sort printed RFQ by item then line number. Make same change to PDFMAKER.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQCOPYNUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Makes the new quote number the old quote number with a-999 on the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQCOPYREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, system will act as if revision during copy processs.  If yes, then revision number logic will be used, if not, then normal number logic will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQIDNOALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set any allocations selected will not actually be allocated to the quote.  This is especially useful for Track Length items.  Since there are different lengths/widths under one item code the counterperson can use the allocation screen to see the availability of different lengths/widths and select one but not actually allocate inventory based on their selection.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQIMPORT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This enables a button on the Header tab of the Customer Quote screen that allows importing items onto quotes.  More information can be found [[Orders|HERE]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLIMITCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will use the older Credit limit check logic for just the RFQ converts.  This will allow using credit limit checks on RFQs, and Approval based checks on Sales Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Accoutn Manager in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds the lock price checkbox from the SO screen to the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKPRICECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically checks the lock price box on line entry to RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQLOCKSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Sales Person in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQNOREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to set norepice checkbox after line save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRICENAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to enable Price Update Message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRINTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the full PrintPO screen is loaded when converting a quote to an order, or when generating bids from a quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQPRINTSCREEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays Additional Print Screen and options when printing a Customer Quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQRESETDROPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQRESETDROPSHIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQRESETLINECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, overrides the default behavior of the Hide Line and Hide Price flags in the Quote screen by clearing the flags on each new line entry. (Use option SORESETLINECHK for the Sales Order screen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSETSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - RFQSETSP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSHOWLF2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will show the linear feet of all panel on the quote. The items need to be in the Panel (PA) department to be included in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQSHOWTAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will default the tax boxed to checked on print RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQTIMERPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes a PDF attachment of the quote when the Quote Timed Alert emails are sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQTIMERAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will copy the account manager on the quote instead of the salesperson when the Quote Timed Alert emails are sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQUPDATELIKE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will ask users to update price for all like items if the price for a line is updated in the Line Item View grid on the Quote screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RFQUPPRICELOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, do not reprice lines with &amp;quot;Lock Price&amp;quot; flag when using the Update Quote Pricing Button on header tab (uP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROGRID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will change the font of column headers that you can edit in to red when turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROLL12BASECOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to pull basecost from SO when calculating invoice cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROOFSLOPE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the item has a SOC question with rcode = &amp;quot;S&amp;quot;, then the value from column F is copied into the answer of the Roof Slope question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ROUNDPRICE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If unit price &amp;gt;25, and price is list price based, then round price up to next dollar. Change SO screen to round price up to next dollar if ROUNDPRICE1 CID option is set, and price is based on ListPrice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDMATERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds a &amp;#039;Has Material&amp;#039; checkbox to the Task Grid which displays a check if material has been added to the service order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDPOLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, populate new POLIST column with linked PO Numbers on Task Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDTOTAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Adds Labor Time, Equipment Time, and Total Time (Lab+Equip) columns to the Task Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDWHSEFILT2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows sorting tasks on the Task Grid by the warehouse indicated on a project.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RTGRIDTOTALDUR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add TotalDur Column to Task Grid.  Sum of all durations for a given task. Filled Out if RTGRIDTOTALDUR is enabled (CID option).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RUNNITEBALSEP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, run the Nightinv GL Balance program at 11pm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===S===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PALLNONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set; then either make the full quantity, or none on current stock levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PBYPHASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes S2P to make due dates from linked phases, also splits PWOs by phase and department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PBYPHASE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, reset start date to duedate - longest fab date of any item on Sub PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PDISPLAYPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips &amp;quot;Print Production Work Orders?&amp;quot; question and automatically displays the Production Work Order screen(s). If cid option is set, launch PWO screen for each PWO instead of bringing up print screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PFULLQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Always defaults to qtyord as production qty. If set, then make qtyord qty (Click on ALL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PNONSTKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Opens the S2P Select Qty to Produce screen with all stock production item&amp;#039;s Qty to Produce value set to zero, matching the function of clicking the &amp;#039;Non-Stk Only&amp;#039; button by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, then the S2P screen will use projected onhand to determine if the item needs to be produced. Also changes the SSA screen to use projected qty to color code lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;S2PSTOCKQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the qty2make will be set to the order qty if the order qty &amp;lt; on hand qty, else will be set to 0, pull from stock will be set to order qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDCONFMOVE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SCHEDCONFMOVE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDMONTHLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in monthly view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDMULTI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in multi-stack view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDPROFESSION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show vcontact.profession underneath Resource Name on Schedule screen. If set, append profession from contact screen to end of current resource name, hours string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDPROJID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays ProjID as first characters on task bar (instead of shortcust). Option to set bartext to projjid instead of shortcust.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDSHOWSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show ShipTo Company Name in time bars instead of SoldTo names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDSTARTFIRST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SCHEDSTARTFIRST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHEDWEEKLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Opens schedule screen in weekly view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHNOW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Schedule Task at Current Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHPHASE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Task Hover Tooltip on the schedule to show detailed information regarding the linked Project Phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SCHSHOWDT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows estimated drive time on Schedule screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SE2SOSORT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sorts the sales order section of the Shipping Event Summary report by Drop Number, then sales order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SE2SOCARTLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the &amp;quot;CartList&amp;quot; variable on the Shipping Event Summary report. When enabled, cartlist will print out the cartons on each sales order, along with the departments represented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEADDNOCUSTCONT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents the &amp;quot;Mark Customer as Contacted on Shipping Event?&amp;quot; prompt from appearing if the Packing Slip is printed from the Load Shipping Event screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEADDTODR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables a prompt when you manually add a sales order to a delivery route shipping event.  This prompt allows you to add the delivery route from the shipping event to the Organization&amp;#039;s Ship To record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEAUTOSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEAUTOSHIP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEBESTBIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enabled, use current bin as ProBin on report.  If more than one bin, make a list BIN(qty),BIN(qty)... If nothing on hand, use ProBin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEBOTRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prioritizes the Backorder highlight color over the Transfer Item color in Load Shipping Event screen when an item is both Backorder and Transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECALCFREIGHT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes freight value when calculating the Estimated Value field.  If not enabled, exclude freight from calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHECKBINQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the selected bin is checked for qty&amp;gt;load qty during carton packing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHECKPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add (NP) to the end of the SO line in clist if item still has pending production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If Set, show new radio buttons on the Print Post Load report screen for &amp;quot;Trucker Fax Delivery Information&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Trucker Fax Pick Up Information&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Shipment Notification&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SECHKUNLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then warn when unlinking a SO from shipping event master if the SO has lines that are packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEDEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEDEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEEXCLALLOCSL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEEXCLALLOCSL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEEXCLPRODSL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEEXCLPRODSL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEFILTERCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEFILTERCHK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEGS128LABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEGS128LABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEHIDETRANS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Hide Transfers box to checked on the Load Shipping Event and Print Pre-Load screens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SELINK4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELINK5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Enable users to link specific lines to specific shipping events and manage shipping events by sales order lines rather than an entire order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SELLUNITPRICING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use the selling unit as the input to the price lookup from the pricing tables and the contract price tables.  If not set, then use the selling price unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOAUTOLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, the system will never auto-calculate the Estimated LBS field. It must be manually input for every Shipping Event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOAUTOVALUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, the system will never auto-calculate the Estimated Value field. It must be manually input for every Shipping Event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOCHK60&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, do not check the +/- 60 day checkbox on the SE screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOLOTALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prevent the user from selecting lot/serials on the Item Transfer Tab of the SE Master that are allocated to sales orders or other Shipping Event Transfers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOUNLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option (SENOUNLOAD) that disables the unload button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENOPRODLBS &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will calculate the estimated weight on the Shipping Event by excluding not-yet-produced material from the weight. The weight calculation will only include completed production, received buyouts and stock material. This calculation will only effect the estimated pounds on the shipping event. The actual will continue to update as material is loaded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the setup option will exclude not-yet-produced material from the pre-load report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENUPSOREQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will update the linked SO REQ Date when the Shipping Event On-Site Date is changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SENUPSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Adjutant will update SO Load Dates, Ship Vias, and SO Line Est. Dates when the linked shipping event Load Date and Ship Via fields are edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPACKLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPACKLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPAPPRCHECK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then all linked sales order must be approved before SE Preload or SE Post Load can be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPCHECKAPPR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPCHECKAPPR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOST2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, defaults Adjutant to use the SEPOST2 version of the Post Load Report, which has more features than the original SEPOST version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOSTDROPPAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add CID option to default Page Break check (SEPOSTDROPPAGE) on Post Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPOSTNODROPRESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, it will skip the second sort if page break by dropno is selected. This will allow users to run the report with the Sort By &amp;quot;SO#/Dept&amp;quot; option and the &amp;quot;Page Break by Drop No&amp;quot; option at the same time. This only affects the SEPOST2 (V2) version of the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPPNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the SE Pre-Load Report will print SO Line Shipping notes under the specific cartonized item when using the CLIST (carton list) expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREBINORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, sort by bin and department instead of item. For Pre-Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREBINORD2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, sort alphabetically by bin name instead of item. For Pre-Load report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPREDROPORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add dropno to main cursor. Add setup option to sort by dropno (SEPREDROPORD). Add logic to copy dropno from shipto cursor into main cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPRELINEORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEPRELINEORD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEPUDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then use PickupDate as controlling date for report if filled out, else fall back to shipdate (loaddate). Shipping forecast report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEREPCLOSESE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SEREPCLOSESE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEREPORTTAB1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to start on first tab. Shipping event viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERIAL2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to pull serial2 from rtasset table, and use as mnum2 as needed  (when updating meter info in conninfo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERIALBYWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change S2P logic to generate serial numbers from different counters based on plant if CID option SERIALBYWHSE is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SERVICEPROCESS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SERVICEPROCESS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHIPSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SESHIPSINGLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWBO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, defaults the &amp;quot;Show Backorders&amp;quot; box to checked on the Post Load Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set then show new Customer Pickup Checkbox. If set, then create an event (SE-CPU-XX-YYYY), where XX is SE type, and YYYY is whse name. Event is CR type if SE is new, ED type if edit of existing SE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWFTLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add QtyinFT and QtyinLBS expressions to Pre-Load and Post-Load reports when enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWINCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add new fields (QtyInInch and PMark) to cursor, fill out for items.  Use FT or IN from unit, or SOC.Rcode = B for inches value.  Use Soc.Rcode = A for Piece Mark.  Enable with SESHOWINCH.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESHOWSERLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Make allocated ser/lots and production serial/lots appear as seperate lines on report. Make logic to split lines a setup option (SESHOWSERLOT)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SESORTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the sorts are added to each other on the &amp;quot;Orders W/O SE&amp;quot; tab of the shipping event viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETQTYTOBLANK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, defaults the qty field to be blank instead of 0 on the material tab of time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETRANSIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If found, transfer items from intercompany SE&amp;#039;s to IN-TRANSIT whse when carton is shipped. When unloading carton, move from IN-TRANSIT whse instead of source whse if option is enabled. Change UnloadCart to use original cost tier if possible. This will make the inventory flow thru the IN-Transit whse at the same cost. Change SEADD2 to unlock UnLoad button if SENOUNLOAD is enabled and SETRANSIT is enabled and SE is intercompany. Change allocated logic to show items allocated from IN-Trans whse once they are shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SETTOONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button Display coil screen to allow a zero qty coil to be reset to a qty of 1. This will allow the Inv Trans/Adj screen to be used to reset the qty of the coil if needed. If enabled, and qty of coil is &amp;lt;=0, the button will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SEVIEWCURRLBS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Fill out current wt column with shipevent.estlbs by default. If option is selected, then use shipevent.curlbs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHAREDATADIR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add program to update the data across all CIDs. (web terminal)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPLOTQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, change qty2ship to lot on hand qty after lot is entered. (Manual ship and project ship). For use on Ship Sales Order and Project Shipping screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPNONEGLOT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works like SHIPNONEGQTYS. If set check for neg qty when using serial/lot items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPNONEGQTYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Does not allow a user to ship a stock item and make it&amp;#039;s owner/warehouse/heldfor/location qty a negative qty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPOUTALT1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows import of custom MBS SHIP.OUT file defined on ECR 33602.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSOBOL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prompt to create BOL after shipping SO  (ShipSO screen only).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSOINVOICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Creates an invoice as soon as shipment is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPSONEGRET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHIPSONEGRET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPTOREQ1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, requires user to enter in a Shipping Contact Name, Email and Phone number when using the Red Plus Ship To add on a Quote or Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPTOREQTAXTABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a tax table to be filled out before allowing a save of the shipto and addshipto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWASSETQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show new AssetQty on RTASSET table, AssetQty on task grid on project screen, and Complete count field on Project Master Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCIDNAME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Show CID Name on Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays cost field on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTABC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display the Customer ABC Code on the Quote and Sales Order header. Display the codes next to customer name on both screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTCAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will display customer type under the billto section of the Sales Order screen (CustCategories exist for billto, soldto and shipto. These are checked in order, the last one filled out will be displayed under billto).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWCUSTPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Displays customer&amp;#039;s price on item lookup instead of List Price. Price shown in the list box is actual price setup in contract or pricing matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWHOURBAR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWHOURBAR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWKEY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWKEY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWLOCATION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and printing packing list, find location of 1 carton the line is packed in, and show in cursor as &amp;quot;location&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWLOCTION&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWLOCTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWMDS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWMDS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWPAAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWPAAGE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWREMARK1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, add rfqmast.remarks to end of note for appr/decline emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWSUSPECTONENTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Display Suspect after adding new company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWTASKASSET&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This option enables a screen that allows you to swap out or replace assets at a location.  If you add an item with the asset attribute to the Material tab of Time and Material Entry (QUICKTIME), the Asset Update screen will display.  The Asset Update screen will display any other assets for the Ship To location of the task that match the Type of the asset being added. If the remove option is selected, the selected asset&amp;#039;s current location is updated to the CID&amp;#039;s default Organization.   Any entries in the RFID and Serial 2 fields of the Asset Update screen will update the RFID and Serial 2 fields for any remaining assets displayed in the grid.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWTOBONORG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWTOBONORG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWAITBOXES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SHOWWAITBOXES&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWARNING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically displays any warning notes attached to the organization when entering SO/PO/TASK/etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHOWWEBEXP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, clicking on VIEW in Pending approvals will launch in browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEBAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Single Inventory Package in System&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEEMAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - In Message Control, the system will send one email to multiple recipients instead of one email per recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLEPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - One Production Work Order per Line Item on SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLETASKLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allow user to transfer single lines from Task to Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGLOTLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add field to cursor (lserial), has lot and CofO data for lot controlled items if CombinleLike items is enabled, and SINGLOTLINE CID option is set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SINGSERLINE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Group serial lines back together on invoice.  Serials are in LSerial field in cursor.  Make same change to PDF maker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SKIPALLOC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPAUTONUMBER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled and SO/PO number is blank, autonumber is ran without prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPCALCWIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skip WIP lookup during processing of grid .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPCOOPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Country of Origin not required on PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPINVDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t run InvDiff Check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPNOINPUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppress the No inputs assigned message for non stock item during assembly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPNOLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - For PWO which would not auto assign non stock material lines that are not linked to PO&amp;#039;s (just skip over them). System will still auto assign linked PO items once received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPPACKLISTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Packing list not required on PO Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPPWLABOR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to skip posting window check when adding labor lines on main timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPQTYCHKSO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bypasses the Quantity Check pop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the Reprice function for time entries. This should be used in environments where tasks are only used for Time &amp;amp; Cost tracking purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSELOOKUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, skip the Interplant SE lookup on PWO assembly when Plant&amp;lt;&amp;gt;SHipWhse, and on Transfer PO receipts when using Temp Whse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSELOOKUPW&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, prevents produced items from automatically being placed on an interplant shipping event in cases where the shipping warehouse is different from the producing warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SKIPSFLAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, skips the query to determine if an item has been sold before when searching for an item on the SO screen and NEWITEMLOOKUP is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTASSEMEVERY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, it allows partially assemble production lines from Connex. If this option is not enabled, Adjutant will wait until Connex data matches up to the full quantity of the production line before the assembly process takes place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOILCHANGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, will print a new coil tag for the coil being used on every coil change from Connex. Connex must be using the API integration for this to work correctly. The AMSPRINTER rule needs to fill out to set where the tag prints, and the machine information on the part needs to be filled out correctly as well.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOMM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If SMARTCOMM option set, don&amp;#039;t check Product and Machine, but do check Machine Name and Profile.  Hide un-needed fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTCOMPANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the first variable in the job line is the company name instead of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTSKIPNOINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This is used with Connex integration. If set, will prevent the assembly and complete of a work order line if there is no inventory match on the material that Connex uses. This will prevent users from shipping the order and allow them to correct the usage before it is invoiced. This would mean that material would need to be correct and existing in the proper warehouse to be used from Connex. Otherwise, the line will remain open. Anything that has a coil match, even if there is not enough on hand to fulfill the usage will process normally.  Bundle tags will not print if the line is not correctly assembled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTNEG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  Allows SmartComm to record coil usage into the negative to show actual quantity used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTUSE6&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  When enabled, this option will assemble items tied to adjustments in SmartComm (tcode=6). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTUSE6USAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works with SMARTCOMM rollformer integration.  When enabled, this option will send adjustments (tcode=6) from SmartComm to Adjutant with other usage transactions. The SMARTUSE6 option must also be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTSLASH1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Eliminates the slashes (/) in the SmartComm data from being sent to the controller.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMARTZEROBATCH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, Adjutant will account for Connex usage that gets sent back to Adjutant with 0 batch numbers. This will be counted as usage in Adjutant, but will not be assigned to an order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMSONLYONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, only the contact listed on the sales order header will receive text message updates.  More information on text message updates can be found [[HOW TO Send Out Text Message Updates for a Sales Order | here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMTPLOG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SMTPLOG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOADDCUST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, adds new blue plus button to create new customer with soldto/billto/shipto attributes. Alter addshipto screen to allow create of billto and sold attributes. Add Price Group dropdown in running in newcust mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOADDOHF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option that will auto-add missing OHF record. If enabled, stk item does not need to setup in the currnt OHF to be used.  Will be added by system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOALLOCATEFULL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allocate whole lot qty when checked on SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOASKPRODQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to change production quantities when submitting a sales order to production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will make SO Printing default to SOAUTO- attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOCLOSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and no open lines, SO will be closed, else it will be left open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOCLOSE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will check each linked sales order for open lines, if none found, the SO will be closed, if some found, the count will be displayed, and the user will be asked if they want to close the sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOAUTOPRINTPACK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then change tool tip on S2P button to &amp;quot;Submit to Plant&amp;quot;, also launch Print SO screen in Packing list mode after generation of PWOs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBASECOSTL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, show a new basecostL field in place of the normal cost field in edit mode. (Field is always readonly since basecostL cannot be changed once the line is saved.) If option is enabled, use basecostL value in Line margin calc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBLOCKBOMS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, do not allow SOs with BOM in the number to go to production (WO Transfer screen will not allow transfer of items that have gone to production, so if the S2P before transfer, they cannot be transferfed later)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOBOMCUSTEDIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to edit a custom BOM even after production has been completed once sent to production. This is typically needed when dealing with sub-assemblies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCANMAKEAVAIL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the &amp;quot;Can Make&amp;quot; function on the S2P screen to use the available quantity instead of the on hand quantity when determining if there is enough inventory to produce the associated Sales Order lines. This will ignore inventory owners and will use the sum of the available quantity from Warehouse/HeldFor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCASHBAL2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, will calculate the cash balance on the Sales Order Header screen by taking the balance from the line items (which is a total unshipped amount) + any invoices or POS payments totals taken on the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHANGEPGROUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows user to change the customer price group per line on the sales order or quote.  When choosing the pricing option a prompt will ask the user if they want to update all the lines on the order to the new price group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHKTAXDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prevents saving Sales Order or Quote lines if the Tax Exempt date on the Ship To record of the order is expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCFIXEDBASE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the Item Master Base Cost when SOCFIXEDPRICE is also enabled and the configurable item does not have a cost adjustment defined. This will allow using the Margin Calculator to assign a discount % for configurable lines before they have been produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCFIXEDPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The controlling quantity price adjustment is set to the customer&amp;#039;s contract price. Other configuration options do not affect the price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKBUYOUT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then show warning popup of save of buyout item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKCOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - CID option to check to ensure COD amount is filled out if terms are COD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKCUSTPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check for duplicate Customer PO on header check. Warn if found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKPOSEC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, checks for PO,ADD security before enabling the GenPO button on SO Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKSTBT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, warns user if the sold to organization is different than the bill to organization upon saving a sales order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKSTOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, check to see if items can be produced based on existing inventory and qtyord production.  Fill out new columns in S2P and SetBundle Screens.  Warn on submit if items cannot be made.  Create PWOCM-XX-YYYY event  (xx = dept, yyyy = whse name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKTAXRATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to SO to check for tax rate not matching current tax rate.  Display message box if different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHECKWT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If setand line has unitw2 =0 and a SOC question with RCode = W, then stop S2P and notify user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCHIDECONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change itemswap logic to ignore the question matchup if SOCHIDECONFIG is on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCOSTADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, use COSTADJ data from SOC to build basecost for Config Type items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCPQUICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The price field on the Quick Line Item Entry tab of the Sales Order may be edited when entering line items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOCUTCHARGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calc cut charge for sales order lines, and add new line to SO.  Create setup screen to control logic used to generate cut charge. SOCUTCHARGE setup option enables logic. Add to RFQ screen also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFALLNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SODEFALLNOTE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFCERTS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options (SODEFCERTS and SODEFMTRS) to default the matching checkbox to checked on new order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then default the CPU option to be checked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFMTRS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options (SODEFCERTS and SODEFMTRS) to default the matching checkbox to checked on new order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SODEFPACKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Sales Order print screen to the Packing List option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOFORCECOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will force COD amount to match OrderAmt if COD terms are set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOFRTCHARGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Calc Frt Charge line based on line items on SO, add new line to SO; Change logic to use Rule to setup charges.  Rule supplies item, price (optional), and FT or LBS flag.  Rule setup is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*text1 = item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*num1 = price (if filled out, else comes from getprice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log1 = LBS flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log2 = FT flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*log3 = Qty = 1 flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item needs to exist, LBS or FT flag needs to be set.  If QTy = 1 set, line will have qty = 1, otherwise qty will be the total lbs or ft.  Setup option SOFRTCHARGE enables logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDECONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the SOC box does not popup (items are treated like they do not have configs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEGM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Gross Margin field on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Remove Pick button from SO screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOHIDEPRICEADJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hides the Price Adjustment of each configuration on the Item Configuration screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOITEMBOXSKIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Skips the List/Add/Re&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOITEMEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - An exact match on item lookup will always pull up the item, even if there are other possible matches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELDIFF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, allow the use of SO type template labels from PrintSO Label screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELMANY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Label counts default to quantity ordered on Print SO Labels screen. Defaults to 1 if not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set show extra column to have qty to print on label. Change the Print SO Label screen to add a column for OPEN item quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLABELQTY2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to keep new qty on label qty, but default to qtyorder instead of qtyopen. See Setup Options Wiki for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLCODEREQONTIMEENTRY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a solution code on time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOREQAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require an Account Manager on the Soldto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOREQSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Require a Salesperson on the Soldto screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOUPDATEAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the AM on linked SO and invoices are updated when the Soldto AM is changed. Only items with linked Shipto AM set to blank are updated. Shipto AM takes priority if set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLDTOZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, Zone is pulled from the SoldTo (District) record rather than the ShipTo (Location) in the Task Entry screen, Reinspection screen, tapping screen, and the Work Order Generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLINELOADDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if set, and SOREQLOADDATE is set, then blank line item Load Dates will be updated with Header Load Date.  Occurs on save of sales order and RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Account Manager in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKBILLTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When set, will prevent the Bill to organization from being changed after an invoice or point of sale payment has been made. This can be overridden with special security on the Sales Order screen (UNLOCKBILLTO). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the cost field is always disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKCOSTPWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Lock the SO line item cost field from being edited by a user after corresponding line has been assembled in production (partial or full assembly). Option to lock cost field on non-stock production items once qtyassem&amp;lt;&amp;gt;0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKDOLSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, line cannot be edited if dollar shipped.   Change logic to prevent delete of dollar shipped line in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKONS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, edit of SO line is not allowed when line is linked to PWO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKPRICECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the Lock Price button on SO line entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOLOCKSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to lock Sales Person in by organization attribute and not by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMANUALNUM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, suppresses autonumber function when saving a SO. Users will always have to manually key in a SO number if this option is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMCSTDCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Controls which cost is used (set for standard cost) with the EXTMARGIN setup option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMULTIWHSEALERT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SO lines that are shipping from a warehouse different than the SO Header warehouse will be highlighted in yellow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOMUSTSAVEHEADER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces the SO Header to be saved before continuing on to the Line Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONEXT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button to SO screen to allow generation of order with next items in chain.  Next item is saved on itemmaster screen on Alt Description tab.  Logic will copy sales order, change SO type (based on sonexttype rule) and swap out items with next item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOAMGSHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SONOAMGSHIPTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOCOPY1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then blank out priority and comment on copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOCOPYASSETTAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then don&amp;#039;t copy AcctMgr from shipto, and revert back to soldto acct manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONODUPPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and SOCHECKCUSTPO set, then when duplicate CustPO found, order cannot be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOEXACT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Only accepts an exact match of the Sales Order number on the SO Shipping screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOLISTZERO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to not allow line save if list price is zero and item is in PriceGroup = NETSTEEL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOPRICENAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Price Nag window on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOQUICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Quick Line Item Entry tab on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONOTEMPLATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the template box is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SONUMPOSTFIX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SONUMPOSTFIX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPACKLINE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOPACKLINE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPACKPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will show a grid before printing the packing list to allow the user to select the lines to print, and the qty to print (qtyopen)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLISTDCODE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will sort Packing Lists for Component orders in Dept code order instead of dept name order.  Make same change in PDF Maker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLUSPLUSUNLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will allow entering a different SOC price than the previously entered price after using the ++ button on a Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPLUSPLUSV2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables new ++ shortcut logic for copying custom BOM details.  Applies to both the RFQ and SO screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOBOMNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, include BOM line inote in PO line note for generated items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOORDERNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-  Copies the Order # text from a Sales Order to the Order # on the Purchase Order when a Purchase Order is created directly from a Sales Order. The PO Order# update only works on the create new PO function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPOQUEST3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Custom grid-style version of the GenPO screen called from the SO.             &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTCHNGORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will call the changeorder screen from the print button on sor3 and pass the project number and SO number when num2 of the SOTYPE rule is equal to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTCOA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add button to PrintSO screen to print COAs for selected SOs based on allocated lots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTLOTQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set add the qty into the lotalloc field  LOT# (QTY).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPRINTMERGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Merge the line items from the entered sales order range into a single sales order for printing  (the first SO is used as the master).  Merge runs when Merge Checkbox is checked, and setup option checks box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWOCHGDDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Due Date on the Production Work Order according to the Load Date on the Sales Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWOPOCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If enabled, show new warning message if a Produced Buyout line has been partially sent to production or placed on a Purchase Order and the user tries to Purchase or Produce the line again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOPWODELETE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, display a message that the linked PWO will be deleted if a user tries to edit a line that has already been sent to production. Editing is only allowed if the PWO line has no usage or assignments. The S2P status for the line will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOQEORDNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - New set up option, SOQEORDNO, If enabled, will allow user to quick edit the Order No field by double clicking on the Orderno Label which will put the field into edit mode. The field will be automatically saved when hitting Enter, or clicking out of the field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQLOADDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, load date is required before header save (estdate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires a PO# to be entered for every sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQREQDATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to require REQdate before save of SO, and Convert of RFQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSALESTEAM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires the Sales Team attribute be filled out for the Customer/Order Type of the SO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shipping Event required on Sales Order. (Shipping Event is always required if multi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQSHIPADDR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ship To address on Sales Order header must have Address, City, State, and Zip Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOREQTAXTABLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ship To address on Sales Order must have a valid tax table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETDROPSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set the dropship flag will reset to no on each line item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETLINECHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, overrides the default behavior of the Hide Line and Hide Price flags in the Sales Order screen by clearing the flags on each new line entry. (Use option RFQRESETLINECHK for the Sales Order screen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORESETSOCCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use basecost if &amp;gt;0, or lstcost2 from itemdet as source of cost data for configurable items with controlling qtys.  Basecost should be set in selling units in this case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORETURNBOM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SORETURNBOM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SORTBYPORDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SORTBYPORDER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSAVENOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the contents of all the notes (Sales Order) boxes will be saved to a text file every 5 seconds when the notes are being edited. Txt files are saved in the TmpSONote folder, with SO-CID if so has number, else is UserID-CID-DateStamp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSCANUPC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables scanning an item&amp;#039;s UPC code to place it on a sales order.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSEPICK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, disable pick button on SO screen to force use of pick button on SE screen.  If not set, disable pick button on SE screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSEPSOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows for more than 10 SOC questions to be loaded in the SOC screen and answered in Order Entry.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSETSP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Default User in Salesperson dropdown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSETSPBLANK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and soldto and shipto SP are blank, and current user is a SP, use current user as SP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCASHBAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then show new cash balance field which is order amt - cash/cc paid amount (on first header tab). Field is updated on SO load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCONFIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWCONFIG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWLASTREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses &amp;quot;last revision&amp;quot; logic on sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWSBOX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWSBOX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWCPU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to show/hide CPU checkbox. If CPU checkbox is checked, then use whse taxtable as taxtable unless shipto or soldto is exempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWSIMPREV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses Simple Revision logic on sales order (most popular option).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSHOWWAIT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SOSHOWWAIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSINGLESHIPTO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Automatically updates all lines on sales order with Ship To entered on header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSKIPDSQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Drop ship box disabled on quick add tab if selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSOABIN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option allows printing the bin on sales order forms for any allocations on the sales order (expression on the form is &amp;#039;C_sodetail.soabin&amp;#039;).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSTARTADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Starts the Sales Order screen in Add mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPITEM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add item swap capability to quote screen.  Apply SOSWAPITEM setup logic to the RFQ screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPITEMC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - During Item Swap, warns user if original item has already been packed in a carton, and notifies if there is insufficient quantity of the new item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Swap location of sell pricing unit and selling price. Update selling price if selling price unit is changed. Use selling price unit as unit when calcuating selling price using getprice logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOSWAPRP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show a &amp;#039;Reprice&amp;#039; checkbox in Line Item View, and only reprice items with &amp;#039;Reprice&amp;#039; box checked during swap. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPDATELIKE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will ask users to update price for all like items if the price for a line is updated in the Line Item View grid on the Sales Order screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPDATEPOQTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When updating the SO of non-stock items tied to a PO, the PO quanitities need to reflect the changes automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOUPSPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  If set, will recalculate the sell price based every time the sell pricing unit is changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOVOIDPOCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and SO has linked POS, do not allow void.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SPLITBASICSRV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if set, break all basic service items into new group (Basic Service, code = B) Make new subtotal values  (extcostB and extpriceB).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SPWOBYLINENO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and SINGLEPWO is enabled, PWO will have SONO-Linenumber as WONO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SSAVGCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Slow Stock Rpt &amp;#039;Avg Cost Logic&amp;#039; is checked by default and the report uses AY, MI, and PR transactions to age the remaining stock inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STAXCOCAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -  Updates the Sales Tax Due report to break out the county tax rates based on taxable caps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;STKADJUSTGL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add GL account to Adjust screen. If filled out, this account is used in place of IC Clearing account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUBSTOAMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Allows S2P to send sub-assemblies to AMS/Connex integration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUBSTKCHK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Check for sub assembly inventory on hand before making PWOs for new ones. If there is not enough inventory, create sub-PWO for quantity needed to fulfill the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUPRESSBNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Suppresses the &amp;quot;Copy to Billing Notes&amp;quot; question on the Time Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SUSPECT_MCLC_REQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Market Seg, Customer Type, Lead Source, Credit Limit required on Suspect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SVRORDLOCKBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and srvord has  been billed, Time/Mat/Equip cannot be added to timesheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWAPPRICEFLD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - SWAPPRICEFLD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWAPSERIAL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Swap serial numbers in itemtrack and cost tier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SWI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This setup option will enable SWI database linking for SWI Marksman/Roper Whitney integration. Contact your consultant to begin the integration process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===T===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPLIMITBUILDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAPLIMITBUILDER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPSINGLETASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, service orders created from the Tap Setup screen for the same address will have unique service order numbers instead of the same service order with a different letter suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASK2PO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, show the PO button on the Material tab of Task Master. If clicked, run the full Generate PO Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKADDBUILDER:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If set and the + button is used to create a ShipTo for a task that is linked to the project, a parent/child relationship will be created with the SoldTo of the project if the organization has the Builder Attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKADDSUBDIV:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If set and the + button is used to create a ShipTo for a task that is linked to the project, a parent/child relationship will be created with the Subdivision organization from the Project Customers tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKBLANKPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Clears out Customer PO field on original task when using the Recurring Task Generator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAPSHOWWARN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and address has a warning note, show note in popup box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKCHECKADUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TASKCHECKADUP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKCHECKCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If there is no time entry(labor,material,equip), give warning to user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKDEFWORKING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prints the Working Form of a Task by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKDUEAT5&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, duedate will be set to 5pm for route generated tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKHIDEECRB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then hide the ECR button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKHIDESEND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then hide send dropdown and button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKIGNOREZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ignores the Zone Resource attribute restriction (this requires the resource to have the same zone as the task).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKLOCKTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then task field is locked during edit. When enabled, do not allow editing of the Task  field after task has been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKMATCHSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, and one of the allowed billto&amp;#039;s matches the shipto, then use that billto&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNEWSEQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the TASK counter in CID Maintenance instead of the SONO counter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNEWWO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to disable Select WO combo box and button (Always create a new one)  CID option is TASKNEWWO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKNODEPTLINK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Any Department can perform any Standard Task; there is no required link between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKOLDMA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to make task screen work in old simple mode (3 fields for manual address, no special shipto needed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKPLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Lock checkbox on the Material tab of the Task Entry screen. The Lock checkbox is used to bypass the pricing program in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables the Price field on the Material tab of the Task Entry screen. Users can edit this field when this setup option is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUESTBIG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - User Defined Questions on tasks are popped up in new window when task is entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUOTE1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, display the new Quote dropdown on the task master.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKQUOTEPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, a PDF version of the quote linked to the task will be saved in the task document vault when the task is initially saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKREQZONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Requires the Zone field to be filled out before saving task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKS2P&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enable, will display the S2P button on the Material tab of the Task Master screen to allow creating PWOs from Tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSKIPCPO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the Customer PO# field on the Task Entry Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSKIPDAYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When creating a new assignment for a task, the day after the last assignment is used as the default schedule date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKSUBSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, display the Subcon Service checkbox on the Generate Purchase Orders For screen if called from a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TASKTASKCR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set and the standard task is changed during edit, generate a new CR event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXFREIGHTSTATE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change SO screen to look at state rule to set taxable flag on FRT type items (log4)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXINACTWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, will show a new Include Inactive Warehouses checkbox on the Sales Tax Due report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXOVERLAYALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to allow other states to use overlays. Put tax cap percent in state rule. If whse has overlay, and shipto in same state, overlay will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXPICKINV&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Defaults the &amp;#039;Select Invoices to Process&amp;#039; option on the Sales Tax Due Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRECALCLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAXRECALCLIST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRETAINAGE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then base retainage on the total amount (including tax), instead of the net amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXRETAINAGE2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then tax is calculated on invoice amount less retainage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXSPEC1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Option to zero out some UseTax Rates. CO-City and County Rates. NM-All but State&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXSPLITBYCOUNTY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Rearranges the city tax to display split out by the county on the Sales Tax Due report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXTABLES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Sales Tax Tables are used and tax rate field on Ship To screen is disabled, tax table must be used in order to obtain a tax rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TAXTABLESORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TAXTABLESORT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TERMSERVER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TERMSERVER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TESTEMAILNONE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options to control system wide email sending from blind send points.  TESTNOEMAIL does not send email at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TESTEMAILSELF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Options to control system wide email sending from blind send points.  TESTEMAILSELF emails back to running user, or abistest@abiscorp.com if no running user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TGLIKELOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, the Like checkbox on the task grid is checked by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TMPREPORTFOLDER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, MAKEREPORT uses c:\adjtemp as target for COPY TO command when making temp copies of report forms.  These files are then copied to correct temp folder using COPY FILE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRANSALLOC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and the lot controlled item has SOALLOCATE lines, then transfer the lines to the new OHF record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRIMXLS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -If enabled, then trim the trailing spaces out of the data before exporting it to excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSADD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Time and Material Entry screen opens in ADD mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKHOURS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks time entries against Block Contracts (prepaid hours or dollars). If exceeded or approaching, warns the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKONHAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Checks current on hand quantities when entering material in the Time and Material Entry screen. Warns user if qty entered is greater than qty on hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHECKPOLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, require all linked POs to be received or closed before locking task is allowed. Remove CID setup option CHKTSPOLNK to allow tasks to be completed with open POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCHKOVERLAP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Use smin and emin to check for overlaps. Change warning to option to cancel entry and change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[TSCHECKOVERLAP2 | TSCHKOVERLAP2]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Works the same way as TSCHKOVERLAP, but has a security token with it that will disallow saving the overlapping time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCOMP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Cursor starts in Completed By field on Time and Material Entry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSCOPYTASKNOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, copy the task note into the timesheet notes box.  If solution code is used, and it has a note and cutrent timesheet note is not empty, prompt to Overwrite, Append or Do Nothing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSEXTRAFLAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, items with the new TASKFLATRATE item attribute will be billed along with the Flat Rate of the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSFORCESPELL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces a spell checks on time entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSGETPOLINES&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When LoadMat button is clicked, loads all linked PO lines into Materials tab of Time and Material Entry screen. PO line may be linked directly to Task, or indirectly linked through the Project or to a Sales Order linked to the Project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSGETPOLINESDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change LoadMat button to transfer all items each time button is clicked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSINCALL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the reprice function will split time entry lines that overlap between regular time and overtime before applying increment logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and REQCOMPSVRORD  (Complete Required before billing) is enabled, once task is billed, it cannot be unlocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSMAT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Time and Material Entry screen opens with Material tab selected instead of Labor tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSMATITEMORD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Items are loaded into the Time and Material Entry screen in Item Code order when the LoadMat button is clicked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNODRIVETIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Disables the DT (Drive Time) button on Time and Material Entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNOEQUIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Hide fields on labor tab that relate to equipment/assets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSNOREPRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSNOREPRICE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSONHAND&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, type ahead options on the material tab of time entry are limited to only show materials that are on-hand/non-stock for that warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRINTING&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then map selected PWO printers back to current TS printer names when printing. (PWOPRINTER must also be on)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRINTPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Print Working/Complete buttons for a task record launch the PDF Viewer and use PDFMaker to print the forms from Adjutant 20/20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSPRODONLY&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSPRODONLY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSQTYFROMTASK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Load Materials function on Time Entry will use the Quantities entered on the Materials Tab of the Task Master screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSHOWAVG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - TSSHOWAVG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSHOWPROJ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add Project ID to Header of screen. If set, change caption of TimeSheet to TS:99999 where 99999 is prooject ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSPLITTIME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, and time &amp;gt; resource def hours per day is entered (just hours, not start/stop), time will be split into  def hours per day blocks, using working calendar for dates.  If no working calendar, M-F will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSTARTSTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When enabled, force user to enter time with start and stop time and calculate the duration and grey out total field. Change the time format javascript code to accept 0355 pm as 3:55 pm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TSSTOCKMATL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then only allow entry of stock items on material tab of time entry.  Do not show Is non stock question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TUESDAYWEEK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Changes the Resource Pay Hours Summary report to calculate overtime based on Tuesday - Monday weeks instead of Sunday - Saturday weeks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TWOLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change logic to print all 1st labels in single loop using g_invdiff, then print all 2nd lables using g_invdiff2a.  Log labels printed to new labellog table.  2nd label still enabled with TWOLABEL option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===U===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UBERLABEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - UBERLABEL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNCHKLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uncheck Load Locked Only box on Billing screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNCHKNOBILL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uncheck Nobill Printing Option on Approve/Edit Billing Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOADCHKTRAN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If enabled, prevents unloading cartons from a top level carton on an Interplant Shipping Event if the cartons have purple transfer lines in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOADDEFWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Defaults the logged in user&amp;#039;s warehouse to the &amp;quot;Unload At&amp;quot; warehouse dropdown on the Unload Carton screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNLOCKOTHER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - UNLOCKOTHER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UNPOCHECKOWNER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables new fields and an ownership check process for the Unbilled PO Receipt Report cursor to show the Current Owner and Transfer Date for lot controlled items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPBASENITE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add process to niteinvcheck to update base cost with avg cost for all items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBAG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When selected, upon transfer using the SE transfer or transfers and adjustments screen, the item will retain the original trackno (or P#), allowing the user to keep the same labels and barcodes for the item. This option will not work if SETRANS is being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Update Base Cost on Item if Receipt cost is higher than current cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEBCOSTBOTH&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Update Base Cost on Item if Receipt cost is higher or lower than current cost. Item must have the UPBCOSTBOTH item attribute. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UPDATEDUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Ask to Update Due Date on Task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USAGEMOD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Includes a sum of Mod In - Mod Out qty in usage calculations. This will allow users to see usage from coils that get modded into slits or flat sheets. Subtracting out the Mod Out will cancel out any freight/paint cost modding to the coil since the Mod In will equal the Mod Out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USAGESELLCOUNT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add logic to calculate the number of times sold (Number of unique Orders for matching S type Itemact records). CID option USAGESELLCOUNT enables logic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USE2FA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables two-factor authentication for logging in to Adjutant 20/20. Users must have a Mobile phone number filled out on their contact record. When attempting to log in, the user will be prompted to enter a 6 digit code and they will receive a text with the code to enter. A code will only need to be entered once every 30 days per device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEADVPDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEADVPDF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEAFI&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add AssetType dropdown to Route Details tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEBINS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Bins added to Ship SO, PWO Yields and inputs.  USEBINS is Setup Option control.  lbinname is label caption code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEBOMBCOST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEBOMBCOST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USECC&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Use credit card processing screens if installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEINVFORM&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set then INVFORM from Invoice header is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEMSNASSONO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Forces Sales Order number to match Project number in auto&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEMULTICURR&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USEMULTICURR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USERISSQL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, then use Adjutant Userid as part of SQL UserID used to log into sql server  (if using SQL logins).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USETSYS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - USETSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;USEWCARD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Enables credit card integration with Heartland processors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===V===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VERBROSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turns on the Verbose Checker on Time entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VINTAGEUPLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VINTAGEUPLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMEXTRA&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMEXTRA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMMAX&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMMAX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTERMS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - VTERMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;VTIMECLOCK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Virtual Timeclock on Schedule if Resource name is double&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===W===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WARNDUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Prompts a possible duplicate login message to allow users to abandon the possible duplicate login, and find the original logged in session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WCHARDLIST&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Add CID option to set filter on Base query to sotype = &amp;#039;B&amp;#039; ro sotype = &amp;#039;M&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBDISPLAY2DECIMALS&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - WEBDISPLAY2DECIMALS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WEBLASTSTOP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Shows user/resource&amp;#039;s last stop time (sotran.stop) from a time entry TODAY. Display this time where the date normally resides as &amp;quot;Last Stop: XX:YY AM/PM&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WHSEACCT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Change Whse screen to allow entry of accts for owners. Create new class to get correct accts from OHF/WhseAcct/CID. Add logic to PO Rec to GL block of super batch. Add code to all other Inv/WIP prcesses in Superbatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WHSEFILTERDEFUSER&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Uses the logged in user&amp;#039;s default warehouse as the default Warehouse for the Quote, Sales Order and Project Grids along with the Customer Statement, Daily Invoice Summary, and Invoice Register Reports. It will also apply the same logic to any block in Adjutant 2020 that has a Warehouse filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WOGENSINGLE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If set, the Work Order Generator will generate tasks with unique task/work order numbers instead of using the same task number with different letters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WORLDSHIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Added new WorldShip interface screen to communicate back and forth with WS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===X===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;XAUPLOAD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Read Process runs as part of FoxProcess.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Setup Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2025&amp;diff=5951</id>
		<title>Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes - 2025</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Release_Notes_-_2025&amp;diff=5951"/>
		<updated>2025-09-22T16:30:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Below are the Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes for Calendar Year 2025.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://abiscorp.com/signup/release.html Sign up for automatic notifications when new versions are available.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==January==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==February==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-02-27:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2502.A.pdf Release Notes-2502.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==March==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==April==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==May==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-05-05:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2505.A.pdf Release Notes-2505.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==June==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N/A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==July==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-07-16:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2507.A.pdf Release Notes-2507.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==August==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==September==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2025-09-22:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/GetFile.aspx?File=A2%20Release%20Notes%202025\2509.A.pdf Release Notes-2509.A]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==October==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==November==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==December==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Release Notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5949</id>
		<title>PWO Visual Scheduler</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5949"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:56:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Production &amp;gt;&amp;gt; PWO Visual Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PWOVisualSchedule_s.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Production PWO Visual Schedule allows users to see their jobs in a calendar format and update the schedule times and even the machine that the job is assigned to run on. The schedule uses tasks to represent the machine production hours needed for each PWO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When everything is set up, production work orders that are tied to specific machines will automatically generate task records that can be moved around on the schedule to adjust the scheduled time or machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWO_Visual_Schedule.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup Required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PWO Visual Schedule requires a few areas of setup to support the feature. Some of these areas of setup may require assistance from ABIS Support personnel. It is highly encouraged to work with an ABIS Support representative for assistance with changes to Rule Maintenance settings and CID Setup Options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the PWO Visual Schedule feature to work, the following setup items must be completed:&lt;br /&gt;
* CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE must be enabled, and all production items should have a Machine defined in their department profile attribute. The machine value is the link to the Asset and Resource records. &lt;br /&gt;
* A single default Standard Task record named PWOGEN must be created.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Profile Machine (PMACHINE) Rule Maintenance record must be updated with scheduling controls for each machine that should show on the PWO Visual Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* New custom Schedule Tabs must be defined and set up in the Schedule Tab Names (TABS) Rule Maintenance record for the new PWO Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* An Asset record must be created for each machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* A Resource record that matches the machine name must be created on the Asset record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enable MULTIMACHINE==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE is required to allow creating PWO records using the combination of Department and Profile Machine. If this option is not already enabled in your environment, contact ABIS Support to discuss enabling the option. There may be database-level changes required for any saved machine names that may require ABIS support to address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create PWOGEN Standard Task==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWOGEN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a standard task with the following details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Task:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Must be PWOGEN&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Can be anything, but PWO Generated Task is suggested&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Priority:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select any valid priority code from the drop-down list to assign the default priority for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of priority codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Category:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate category to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work category codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Department:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate department to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work department codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Set up PMACHINE Rule Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PMACHINE.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above is an example PMACHINE Rule Maintenance setup for a few PBR Panel machines. Configure each machine that you want to use with PWO Visual Scheduler. &lt;br /&gt;
Below are fields related to the PWO Visual Schedule setup. If this Rule Maintenance record needs the newer fields added, it is highly recommended to contact ABIS Support for assistance. Updating Rule Maintenance records incorrectly can lead to destroyed data and can cause certain features/systems to stop functioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Units per Hour (text3): &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the unit of measure (i.e. FT, LBS, EA) that will be used for tracking the machine&amp;#039;s production capacity.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Plant (tex4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This should match the Production Plant name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tag ID (text5):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This value must exactly match the Asset record Tag ID value for the machine Asset record in the next step. Best practice is to match the Asset Tag ID and the machine name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty per Hour (num2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the Qty (in the same unit as Units per Hr) for the machine&amp;#039;s capacity in an hour.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hours per day (num3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the number of hours available for that machine in a day.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job Setup (num4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter any time that should be added to each job for machine setup, expressed as fractions of an hour. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Plant ID (num5):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the LoctID value for the Production Plant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Customize Schedule Tabs as Needed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TABS.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add any new Schedule tabs that are needed in the Schedule Tab Names (TABS) Rule Maintenance record and check the &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; box. Note that the new logic2 field labeled &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; is required to designate a tab name for the PWO Visual Schedule. If the rule record does not have the &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; logic field, work with ABIS Support to get it added. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create an Asset Record for each Machine==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Asset.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each machine that will be used with visual scheduling must be added as an Asset record with the Asset Tag ID matching the Profile Machine rule value. The Owner and Current Location are generally set to your primary Organization ID. The Based On value requires an Item Master item code - generally a MISC item is appropriate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the Resource Attribute is attached to the Asset record on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a Resource Record for each Machine Asset==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each Asset record, a Resource record must be created. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Make sure the Resource name value matches the machine name from the PMACHINE rule. The logic is hard-coded to assume the resource matches the machine name. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the desired Schedule Tab name (from the TABS rule) where the machine resource should show on the schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
The remaining required fields can be completed with whatever defaults make the most sense. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the above pieces are in place, when a user submits a work order to the plant, the system will generate a task record linked to that PWO that is represented on a custom schedule screen according to it&amp;#039;s PWO Schedule Date and expected duration based on the machine&amp;#039;s capacity settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Asset Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Rule Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Task Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:TABS.png&amp;diff=5948</id>
		<title>File:TABS.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:TABS.png&amp;diff=5948"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:54:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Resource.png&amp;diff=5947</id>
		<title>File:Resource.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Resource.png&amp;diff=5947"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:54:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PWOGEN.png&amp;diff=5946</id>
		<title>File:PWOGEN.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PWOGEN.png&amp;diff=5946"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:54:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PMACHINE.png&amp;diff=5945</id>
		<title>File:PMACHINE.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PMACHINE.png&amp;diff=5945"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:54:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Asset.png&amp;diff=5944</id>
		<title>File:Asset.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:Asset.png&amp;diff=5944"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:54:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PWO_Visual_Schedule.png&amp;diff=5943</id>
		<title>File:PWO Visual Schedule.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=File:PWO_Visual_Schedule.png&amp;diff=5943"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:53:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5942</id>
		<title>PWO Visual Scheduler</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5942"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T20:24:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Production &amp;gt;&amp;gt; PWO Visual Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PWOVisualSchedule_s.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Production PWO Visual Schedule allows users to see their jobs in a calendar format and update the schedule times and even the machine that the job is assigned to run on. The schedule uses tasks to represent the machine production hours needed for each PWO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When everything is set up, production work orders that are tied to specific machines will automatically generate task records that can be moved around on the schedule to adjust the scheduled time or machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup Required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PWO Visual Schedule requires a few areas of setup to support the feature. Some of these areas of setup may require assistance from ABIS Support personnel. It is highly encouraged to work with an ABIS Support representative for assistance with changes to Rule Maintenance settings and CID Setup Options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the PWO Visual Schedule feature to work, the following setup items must be completed:&lt;br /&gt;
* CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE must be enabled, and all production items should have a Machine defined in their department profile attribute. The machine value is the link to the Asset and Resource records. &lt;br /&gt;
* A single default Standard Task record named PWOGEN must be created.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Profile Machine (PMACHINE) Rule Maintenance record must be updated with scheduling controls for each machine that should show on the PWO Visual Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* New custom Schedule Tabs must be defined and set up in the Schedule Tab Names (TABS) Rule Maintenance record for the new PWO Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* An Asset record must be created for each machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* A Resource record that matches the machine name must be created on the Asset record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enable MULTIMACHINE==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE is required to allow creating PWO records using the combination of Department and Profile Machine. If this option is not already enabled in your environment, contact ABIS Support to discuss enabling the option. There may be database-level changes required for any saved machine names that may require ABIS support to address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create PWOGEN Standard Task==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a standard task with the following details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Task:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Must be PWOGEN&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Can be anything, but PWO Generated Task is suggested&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Priority:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select any valid priority code from the drop-down list to assign the default priority for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of priority codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Category:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate category to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work category codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Department:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate department to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work department codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Set up PMACHINE Rule Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above is an example PMACHINE Rule Maintenance setup for a few PBR Panel machines. Configure each machine that you want to use with PWO Visual Scheduler. &lt;br /&gt;
Below are fields related to the PWO Visual Schedule setup. If this Rule Maintenance record needs the newer fields added, it is highly recommended to contact ABIS Support for assistance. Updating Rule Maintenance records incorrectly can lead to destroyed data and can cause certain features/systems to stop functioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Units per Hour (text3): &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the unit of measure (i.e. FT, LBS, EA) that will be used for tracking the machine&amp;#039;s production capacity.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Plant (tex4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This should match the Production Plant name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tag ID (text5):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This value must exactly match the Asset record Tag ID value for the machine Asset record in the next step. Best practice is to match the Asset Tag ID and the machine name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty per Hour (num2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the Qty (in the same unit as Units per Hr) for the machine&amp;#039;s capacity in an hour.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hours per day (num3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the number of hours available for that machine in a day.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job Setup (num4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter any time that should be added to each job for machine setup, expressed as fractions of an hour. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Plant ID (num5):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the LoctID value for the Production Plant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Customize Schedule Tabs as Needed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add any new Schedule tabs that are needed in the Schedule Tab Names (TABS) Rule Maintenance record and check the &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; box. Note that the new logic2 field labeled &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; is required to designate a tab name for the PWO Visual Schedule. If the rule record does not have the &amp;#039;PWO&amp;#039; logic field, work with ABIS Support to get it added. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create an Asset Record for each Machine==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each machine that will be used with visual scheduling must be added as an Asset record with the Asset Tag ID matching the Profile Machine rule value. The Owner and Current Location are generally set to your primary Organization ID. The Based On value requires an Item Master item code - generally a MISC item is appropriate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the Resource Attribute is attached to the Asset record on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a Resource Record for each Machine Asset==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each Asset record, a Resource record must be created. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;IMPORTANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Make sure the Resource name value matches the machine name from the PMACHINE rule. The logic is hard-coded to assume the resource matches the machine name. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the desired Schedule Tab name (from the TABS rule) where the machine resource should show on the schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
The remaining required fields can be completed with whatever defaults make the most sense. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the above pieces are in place, when a user submits a work order to the plant, the system will generate a task record linked to that PWO that is represented on a custom schedule screen according to it&amp;#039;s PWO Schedule Date and expected duration based on the machine&amp;#039;s capacity settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Asset Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Rule Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Task Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5941</id>
		<title>PWO Visual Scheduler</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5941"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T16:13:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Production &amp;gt;&amp;gt; PWO Visual Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PWOVisualSchedule_s.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Production PWO Visual Schedule allows users to see their jobs in a calendar format and update the schedule times and even the machine that the job is assigned to run on. The schedule uses tasks to represent the machine production hours needed for each PWO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When everything is set up, production work orders that are tied to specific machines will automatically generate task records that can be moved around on the schedule to adjust the scheduled time or machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup Required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PWO Visual Schedule requires a few areas of setup to support the feature. Some of these areas of setup may require assistance from ABIS Support personnel. It is highly encouraged to work with an ABIS Support representative for assistance with changes to Rule Maintenance settings and CID Setup Options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the PWO Visual Schedule feature to work, the following setup items must be completed:&lt;br /&gt;
* CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE must be enabled and all production items should have a Machine defined in their department profile attribute. The machine value is the link to the Asset and Resource records. &lt;br /&gt;
* A single default Standard Task record named PWOGEN must be created.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Profile Machine Rule Maintenance record must be updated with scheduling controls for each machine that should show on the PWO Visual Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* An Asset record must be created for each machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* A Resource record that matches the machine name must be created on the Asset record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enable MULTIMACHINE==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The CID Setup Option MULTIMACHINE is required to allow creating PWO records using the combination of Department and Profile Machine. If this option is not already enabled in your environment, contact ABIS Support to discuss enabling the option. There may be database-level changes required for any saved machine names that may require ABIS support to address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create PWOGEN Standard Task==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a standard task with the following details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Task:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Must be PWOGEN&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Can be anything, but PWO Generated Task is suggested&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Priority:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select any valid priority code from the drop-down list to assign the default priority for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of priority codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Category:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate category to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work category codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Department:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select an appropriate department to use for all PWOGEN tasks. This list of work department codes will be unique for each customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Set up PMACHINE Rule Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above is an example PMACHINE Rule Maintenance setup for a few PBR Panel machines. Below are fields related to the PWO Visual Schedule setup. If this Rule Maintenance record needs the newer fields added, it is highly recommended to contact ABIS Support for assistance. Updating Rule Maintenance records incorrectly can lead to destroyed data and can cause certain features/systems to stop functioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Units per Hour (text3): &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the unit of measure (i.e. FT, LBS, EA) that will be used for tracking the machine&amp;#039;s production capacity.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Plant (tex4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This should match the Production Plant name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tag ID (text5):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This value must exactly match the Asset record Tag ID value for the machine Asset record in the next step. Best practice is to match the Asset Tag ID and the machine name. &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty per Hour:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hours per day:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To schedule a Report Set, select the Events tab, and then choose Report Set from the Priority drop-down menu. Next, enter the Start and End Dates, as well as the Time you want the report set to be scheduled. Next, select the frequency (Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly) in which the report set should be posted. Next, select the specific report set(s) and CID(s) from the corresponding lists: Report Sets and CIDs. Lastly, select the &amp;quot;Add Event&amp;quot; button to schedule your Report Set(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-01-16_105698.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Viewing/Editing Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Double-click a Report Set to view the details of the reports, who they&amp;#039;re sent to, where they&amp;#039;re saved, etc.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_View_Report_Set_Details.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Right-Click a Report Set or Batch, then select Change Time, Change Schedule (Extend Event(s)), or Delete Event to modify it. You can reschedule and delete future events as well.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Modify.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Time.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Schedule (Extend Event(s))&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Schedule_(Extend_Event(s)).jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete Event&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Delete_Event.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Time and Materials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Project Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5940</id>
		<title>PWO Visual Scheduler</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=PWO_Visual_Scheduler&amp;diff=5940"/>
		<updated>2025-08-08T14:18:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Auto Process Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  AUTOSCHVIEW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Auto Process Schedule screen is used to set up automatic batches and report sets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Schedule Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Schedule shows a daily view of each report set and batch that is scheduled to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can scroll through each week by using the corresponding Previous Week and Next Week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on any Report Set record on the screen to view more details about it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click on any Report Set or Auto Batch to delete it.  You are also presented with the option to delete all future events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add Auto Batch===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To schedule an Auto Batch, select the Events tab, and then choose Auto Batch from the Priority drop-down menu. Next, enter the Start and End Dates, as well as the Time you want the batch to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should schedule the batch to run according to your report sets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if a Balance Sheet is in your report sets, then you want the batch to run before the Balance Sheet report set so that everything has been batched and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no CID filter for the Auto Batches.  Each CID must be configured to run an auto batch.  Please see the [[Auto Batch Options - AUTOBATCH Rule]] for more information.  Also, the AUTOBATCH setup option must be enabled for the batch to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Events_Auto_Batch.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add Report Set===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To schedule a Report Set, select the Events tab, and then choose Report Set from the Priority drop-down menu. Next, enter the Start and End Dates, as well as the Time you want the report set to be scheduled. Next, select the frequency (Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly) in which the report set should be posted. Next, select the specific report set(s) and CID(s) from the corresponding lists: Report Sets and CIDs. Lastly, select the &amp;quot;Add Event&amp;quot; button to schedule your Report Set(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-01-16_105698.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Viewing/Editing Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Double-click a Report Set to view the details of the reports, who they&amp;#039;re sent to, where they&amp;#039;re saved, etc.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_View_Report_Set_Details.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Right-Click a Report Set or Batch, then select Change Time, Change Schedule (Extend Event(s)), or Delete Event to modify it. You can reschedule and delete future events as well.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Modify.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Time.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Schedule (Extend Event(s))&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Schedule_(Extend_Event(s)).jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete Event&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Delete_Event.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Time and Materials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Project Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5937</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5937"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T18:01:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Welcome to the Adjutant Software Platform Wiki resource==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This Adjutant Wiki currently hosts the consultant checklists for application setup and data import. These wiki pages were created for ABIS internal use, but may be shared with customers under certain circumstances. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site is currently under construction with new content getting added periodically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reference information available in each section below is still being developed and additional applications/sections will be added as they are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;  style=&amp;quot;text-align: left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Outline Of Topics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Best Practices|Best Practice Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Frequently Asked Questions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Topics by Application/Module Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Payable|Accounts Payable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Receivable|Accounts Receivable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Address Book|Address Book]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Approval Management|Approval Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Asset Management|Asset Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Commissions|Commissions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Contract Management|Contract Mangement]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Ledger|General Ledger]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Import/Export|Import/export]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Integrations|Integrations]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Item Control|Item Control]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Marketing|Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Order Entry|Order Entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Production|Production]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Project Management|Projects]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Purchasing|Purchasing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Quotes|Quotes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Release Notes|Release Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Rule Maintenance|Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Sales Tax|Sales Tax]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Setup Options|Setup Options]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Shipping|Shipping]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:System Manager|System Manager]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Task Management|Task Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Tasks and Time Billing|Tasks and Time Billing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Wireless Warehouse|Wireless Warehouse]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Workflow Routing|Workflow Routing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Questionnaires&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[All Questionnaires]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Release Notes|Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Setup Guides|Implementation Setup Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Import Guides|Import Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Go-Live Guides|Go-Live Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Training Guides|Training Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Interface|General Interface]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[Rules of Conduct]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[pageediting|Page Editing Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disclaimer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Opinions expressed by wiki authors or commentators are entirely their own and do not reflect the position of ABIS Consulting Group. Any advice or recommendations discussed on this wiki (or sites it links to) are not validated by ABIS.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Have You Reached This Page in Error?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you reached this page by clicking on the Wiki button on the $wgExternalLinkTarget =  [http://www.abiscorp.com/AdjWiki/GetFile.aspx?File=System%20Manager\f12.png&amp;amp;AspxAutoDetectCookieSupport=1|Info/Wiki screen], please tell us about it by Emailing your implementation consultant.  Please include the screen name in your email and we&amp;#039;ll get a wiki page linked ASAP.  Thanks!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5936</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5936"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:56:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Welcome to the Adjutant Software Platform Wiki resource==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This Adjutant Wiki currently hosts the consultant checklists for application setup and data import. These wiki pages were created for ABIS internal use, but may be shared with customers under certain circumstances. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site is currently under construction with new content getting added periodically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reference information available in each section below is still being developed and additional applications/sections will be added as they are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;  style=&amp;quot;text-align: left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Outline Of Topics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Best Practices|Best Practice Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Frequently Asked Questions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Topics by Application/Module Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Payable|Accounts Payable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Receivable|Accounts Receivable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Address Book|Address Book]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Approval Management|Approval Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Asset Management|Asset Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Commissions|Commissions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Contract Management|Contract Mangement]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Ledger|General Ledger]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Import/Export|Import/export]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Integrations|Integrations]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Item Control|Item Control]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Marketing|Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Order Entry|Order Entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Production|Production]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Project Management|Projects]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Purchasing|Purchasing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Quotes|Quotes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Release Notes|Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Rule Maintenance|Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Sales Tax|Sales Tax]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Setup Options|Setup Options]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Shipping|Shipping]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:System Manager|System Manager]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Task Management|Task Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Tasks and Time Billing|Tasks and Time Billing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Wireless Warehouse|Wireless Warehouse]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Workflow Routing|Workflow Routing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Questionnaires&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[All Questionnaires]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Release Notes|Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Setup Guides|Implementation Setup Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Import Guides|Import Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Go-Live Guides|Go-Live Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Training Guides|Training Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Interface|General Interface]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[Rules of Conduct]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[pageediting|Page Editing Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disclaimer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Opinions expressed by wiki authors or commentators are entirely their own and do not reflect the position of ABIS Consulting Group. Any advice or recommendations discussed on this wiki (or sites it links to) are not validated by ABIS.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Have You Reached This Page in Error?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you reached this page by clicking on the Wiki button on the $wgExternalLinkTarget =  [http://www.abiscorp.com/AdjWiki/GetFile.aspx?File=System%20Manager\f12.png&amp;amp;AspxAutoDetectCookieSupport=1|Info/Wiki screen], please tell us about it by Emailing your implementation consultant.  Please include the screen name in your email and we&amp;#039;ll get a wiki page linked ASAP.  Thanks!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5935</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=5935"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:55:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Welcome to the Adjutant Software Platform Wiki resource==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This Adjutant Wiki currently hosts the consultant checklists for application setup and data import. These wiki pages were created for ABIS internal use, but may be shared with customers under certain circumstances. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site is currently under construction with new content getting added periodically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reference information available in each section below is still being developed and additional applications/sections will be added as they are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;  style=&amp;quot;text-align: left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Outline Of Topics&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Best Practices|Best Practice Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Frequently Asked Questions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Topics by Application/Module Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Payable|Accounts Payable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Accounts Receivable|Accounts Receivable]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Address Book|Address Book]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Approval Management|Approval Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Asset Management|Asset Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Commissions|Commissions]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Contract Management|Contract Mangement]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Ledger|General Ledger]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Import/Export|Import/export]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Integrations|Integrations]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Item Control|Item Control]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Marketing|Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Order Entry|Order Entry]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Production|Production]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Project Management|Projects]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Purchasing|Purchasing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Quotes|Quotes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Release Notes|Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Rule Maintenance|Rule Maintenance]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Sales Tax|Sales Tax]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Setup Options|Setup Options]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Shipping|Shipping]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:System Manager|System Manager]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Task Management|Task Management]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Tasks and Time Billing|Tasks and Time Billing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Wireless Warehouse|Wireless Warehouse]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Category:Workflow Routing|Workflow Routing]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Questionnaires&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[All Questionnaires]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Release Notes|Adjutant 20/20 Release Notes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Setup Guides|Implementation Setup Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Import Guides|Import Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Go-Live Guides|Go-Live Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:Training Guides|Training Guides]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[:Category:General Interface|General Interface]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[Rules of Conduct]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[pageediting|Page Editing Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disclaimer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Opinions expressed by wiki authors or commentators are entirely their own and do not reflect the position of ABIS Consulting Group. Any advice or recommendations discussed on this wiki (or sites it links to) are not validated by ABIS.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Have You Reached This Page in Error?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you reached this page by clicking on the Wiki button on the $wgExternalLinkTarget =  [http://www.abiscorp.com/AdjWiki/GetFile.aspx?File=System%20Manager\f12.png&amp;amp;AspxAutoDetectCookieSupport=1|Info/Wiki screen], please tell us about it by Emailing your implementation consultant.  Please include the screen name in your email and we&amp;#039;ll get a wiki page linked ASAP.  Thanks!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=ASC_Setup&amp;diff=5934</id>
		<title>ASC Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=ASC_Setup&amp;diff=5934"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:40:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__ &lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a guide for consultants to use to set up an ASC connection from start to finish. Setup typically takes a few hours and involves making connections from the ASC controller software to the Adjutant database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The goal is to establish a direct connection from ASC controllers to Adjutant reading a specific set of data tables. The function of the integration is for Adjutant to pass order and bundle information to ASC controllers and to receive back production and material usage information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is different from AMS and Beck integration because there is no middle software (Eclipse or Connex). The link is directly from the controller to Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ASC Integration runs off of a service called AdjAmsProcess.exe. The service pushes data to the tables that ASC reads for inbound orders, then reads the tables that ASC writes to for outbound usage data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Initial Set Up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of things that can and should be set up before you are ready to &amp;quot;flip the switch&amp;quot;. The Database Set Up section, the Item Attributes section, and the Rule Setup sections should all be completed before working with ASC for the integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are ready to &amp;quot;flip the switch&amp;quot;, then the Setup Options section, then the Coil Table Population section, then the Ready to Test section. This set up needs to be done all at once, so be sure you budget your time to get each of these done and troubleshoot if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Database Set Up===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ASC connects back to Adjutant using custom SQL tables that will need to be set up per customer. These do not exist by default, so David will need to create them on an as needed basis. For the On Demand coil table, David will typically name the view ASC_STOCK_WhseName&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sending the following email to support@abiscorp.com should make the ticket you need. Be sure to replace your customer name, custno, and resource ID in the tag and body below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Please create the ASC tables needed for ASC integration on [your customer&amp;#039;s] system. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;custno[&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;resid[&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Your ResID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;escalate[y]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;priority[p2]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Item Attributes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Adjutant to recognize and push an item out to ASC, it needs to have the proper item attribute (Attribute name &amp;quot;ASCROLL&amp;quot; with form &amp;quot;AMSPROD&amp;quot; in the Item Attribute Rule). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Attribute-asc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ASC Product Attribute jump screen has three fields. There is no database of ASC items, so these fields will be set up with Adjutant data. This information can be filled out using an Excel import (download here) and shows data from the AMSXREF table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ASC Material: This is the material as ASC understands it to use make this item. Similar to the BOM material in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASC Product: This is the ASC name for the item you are making. &lt;br /&gt;
* ASC Machine Number: This is the corresponding Machine ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plant/Rollformer/Machine/Length(FT) Grid: This is used if there are different machines used in each plant. This is controlled in the AMSXREFD table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any item and material that is interacting with ASC will need this attribute. This means that every coil will have the attribute with &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the Material section filled out. Adjutant will remove the other fields and recognize it as material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed run through of the ASC Xref Import, [http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=AMS_Cross-Reference_Import_Guide See this guide]. It&amp;#039;s the same import that the AMS Xref process uses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xref-asc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few rules that need to be set up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASC Process Rule (ASCPROCESS)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This rule will determine the various processes that are used. These entries are warehouse specific, so if setting up for multiple warehouses, should include each entry shown below &amp;#039;&amp;#039;per each warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Important note: The Loctid (num 1) is the Warehouse Key number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything else should be set up as shown in the image, paying special attention to which is an import or export process (Log 1 and Log 2 respectively). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ASCProcess Rule.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ASC Printer Rule (ASCPRINTER) - Optional - &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This rule will allow you to set the printers per machine per location to print bundle and carton tags. There are certain set up options (see below) that are needed to print labels from the machine based on bundling done during the S2P process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine name (Text 1) must match the profile machine rule exactly for it to work. The UNC Name for the printer (Text 2) must match the UNC name for the printer in Printer Control exactly. This will be paired with the Loctid (num 1) to allow you to print to machines in multiple warehouses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ASC Printer Rule.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==ASC Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to provide the contact you are working with from ASC the database credentials to connect to Adjutant (reference the Cstring), but past that, all setup on the ASC side is handled by their team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several set up options are available, depending on how ASC and Adjutant will be used together. Certain things need to be considered, such as bundling, scrapping and label printing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are several important options related to ASC. Not all are required - required options will say &amp;quot;(REQ)&amp;quot; next to the option. This list is not extensive. There are many more that are specific to certain customers and not relevant to a normal set up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ASC (REQ) - turns the whole thing on. &lt;br /&gt;
* ASCASSEMPWO (REQ) - enables the logic to auto assemble and complete work orders coming from ASC.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASCCTAG - will print bundle tags for bundles created when they are sent to ASC. This will use the ASCPRINTER rule set up previously to determine which printer is used. Lines sent to the ASCproduct table with a 0 quantity and bndleprint =’y’ will print a bundle tag during ASC integration.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASCPRINTCTAG - will print carton tags at the same time the bundle tag is printed if ASCCTAG is also on.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASCFLAGBUNDLE - uses a new bndleprint flag in ascproduct table to control when bundles are printed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASCANYCOIL - will allow Adjutant to accept and use whatever coil is scanned through ASC regardless of production plant. &lt;br /&gt;
* ASCADDCOIL - when set, adjusts coil in Adjutant to meet ASC demand.&lt;br /&gt;
* ASCSKIPBUNDLE - will skip the bundle process during the S2P. Orders will be manually bundles using the scanner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coil Table Population==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin testing, you will need to run the Purge and Reload Controller Coils process in order to populate the ASC stock table with the current inventory. This will take all the open coils for the selected warehouse, remove and re-add them so they can be processed into the ASC_Stock_WhseName table. For most customers, this should take 10 minutes or less, but it should be run outside of business hours because it does lock the itemtrack table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed, run &amp;quot;Select * From asC_stock_WhseName&amp;quot; to verify that the coils are in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Purge Coil.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ready to Test==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once ASC is ready and connected, flipping on the setup options and running the AdjAmsProcess will make the integration live.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AdjAMSProcess.exe is the process used to push data back and forth. Make sure you have the latest version from the FTP folder. Run it in a local session to test for errors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to test is to take an order with an item having the Adj ASC attribute and send it to production. The line should appear in the amsorder table (select top 100 * from amsorder). The amsorder.datesent field should get filled out as the ASC process pushes it to the ASC database table, asc_orderin. Once it processes from there, have your customer verify they can see it on the controller. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When coil is scanned from the ASC, it should verify from the Adjutant coil tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracking return usage is more difficult since this can only be done as the machine actually does the production. With your customer, settle on an order being run and track it through in the ascproduct table. If it shows in that table, verify the PWO has usage assigned and is completed. The ascproduct table should have the coil that was scanned in the ascproduct.coilmat field. If you find &amp;quot;NO COIL MATCH&amp;quot;, it was not able to find the coil. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If nothing is coming back, turn off the services, and go back to the start to make sure the right set up options and tables are matched correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are confident that everything is set up correctly, send an email to support to set up AdjAMSProcess as a service if they are hosted. Otherwise, set up AdjAMSProcess in the customers&amp;#039; Service + in their system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helpful Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ASC contact that set this up was Andrew Flack,  aflack@ascmachinetoolsinc.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Integrations]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Setup Guides]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=AMS_Setup&amp;diff=5933</id>
		<title>AMS Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=AMS_Setup&amp;diff=5933"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:40:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__ &lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a guide for consultants to use to set up an AMS connection from start to finish. Setup typically takes a few hours and involves making connections from the Eclipse software to the Adjutant database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The goal is to establish an ODBC connection from Eclipse to Adjutant reading a specific set of data tables. The function of the integration is for Adjutant to pass order and bundle information into Eclipse/AMS and to receive back production and material usage information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, AMS Integration involved sending flat files across the servers back and forth with the necessary data. As of today, the most efficient way to pass data back and forth is by a direct SQL data transfer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This set up assumes a hosted connection, though non-hosted connections have a similar and at times identical setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AMS Integration runs off of a service called AdjAmsProcess.exe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Initial Set Up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of things that can and should be set up before you are ready to &amp;quot;flip the switch&amp;quot;. The Database Set Up section, the Item Attributes section, and the Rule Setup sections should all be completed before working with Eclipse for the integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are ready to &amp;quot;flip the switch&amp;quot;, you will complete the Eclipse Setup section, then the Setup Options section, then the Coil Table Population section, then the Ready to Test section. This set up needs to be done all at once, so be sure you budget your time to get each of these done and troubleshoot if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Database Set Up===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eclipse uses what is called &amp;quot;On Demand&amp;quot; coil verification. This means when a user scans a coil, they call back a special database table that has all the right information in place. This means that David will need to create new AMS specific data tables. These tables will be matched up in the Eclipse screen below. Typically the tables are named AMS_*** where the *** will match the Eclipse name. For the On Demand coil table, David will typically name the view AMS_STOCK_WhseName&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sending the following email to support@abiscorp.com should make the ticket you need. Be sure to replace your customer name, custno, and resource ID in the tag and body below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Please create the AMS tables needed for Eclipse integration on [your customer&amp;#039;s] system. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;custno[&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;CUSTNO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;resid[&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Your ResID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;escalate[y]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;priority[p2]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Item Attributes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Adjutant to recognize and push an item out to Eclipse, it needs to have the proper item attribute (Attribute name &amp;quot;AMS&amp;quot; with form &amp;quot;AMSPROD&amp;quot; in the Item Attribute Rule). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:amsrule.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AMS Product Attribute jump screen has three fields. These fields will need to line up with the Eclipse data exactly. The preferred scenario is that the customer sets up their Eclipse items with the same names as their item codes in Adjutant. That makes for an easy data import. This information can be filled out using an Excel import (download here) and shows data from the AMSXREF table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* AMS Material: This is the material as AMS understands it to use make this item. Similar to the BOM material in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMS Product: This is the AMS name for the item you are making. &lt;br /&gt;
* AMS Machine Number: This is the corresponding Machine ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plant/Rollformer/Machine/Length(FT) Grid: This is used if there are different machines used in each plant. This is controlled in the AMSXREFD table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any item and material that is interacting with AMS/Eclipse will need this attribute. This means that every coil will have the attribute with &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the Material section filled out. Adjutant will remove the other fields and recognize it as material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed run through of the AMS Xref Import, [http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=AMS_Cross-Reference_Import_Guide See this guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki AMS Attribute Jump Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few rules that need to be set up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMS Process Rule (AMSPROCESS)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This rule will determine the various processes that are used. These entries are warehouse specific, so if setting up for multiple warehouses, should include each entry shown below &amp;#039;&amp;#039;per each warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Important note: The Loctid (num 1) is the Warehouse Key number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything else should be set up as shown in the image, paying special attention to which is an import or export process (Log 1 and Log 2 respectively). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Rule AMS Process.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMS Printer Rule (AMSPRINTER) - Optional - &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This rule will allow you to set the printers per machine per location to print bundle and carton tags. There are certain set up options (see below) that are needed to print labels from the machine based on bundling done during the S2P process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine name (Text 1) must match the profile machine rule exactly for it to work. The UNC Name for the printer (Text 2) must match the UNC name for the printer in Printer Control exactly. This will be paired with the Loctid (num 1) to allow you to print to machines in multiple warehouses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Rule AMS Printer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AMS Scrap Rule (AMSSCRAPXREF) - Optional - &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This rule will allow you to match scrap codes sent back from AMS to different item codes. This is useful if you wanted to direct various kinds of scrap into different expense accounts. Text 1 will be the numeric Scrap Code received from AMS. Text 2 is the Item Code that it will go against. It is possible that these AMS codes are dynamic and can change. You will need to work with AMS and with your customer to make sure they are correct and are being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS_Wiki_Rule_Scrap.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Eclipse Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will describe everything that needs to take place on the Eclipse side. Your customer will need to grant you some form of screen share access to the computer on which Eclipse is installed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1: Find the Eclipse folder installed on the C Drive. This is a centralized folder that has all the root files for Eclipse, similar to the Adjutant folder for our customers. Open the SQL Setup File. It is always helpful to Run as Admin if possible. Important note - this program cannot be opened while Eclipse is running. You need to shut it down before this will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2: Establish an ODBC connection. On the Import(1) tab there is a button that says &amp;quot;ODBC&amp;quot; which will launch the standard ODBC screen we use to connect for scanners. The connection will be mostly the same as if setting up the scanners, except SQL Native Client 9 will not work. You can just use the SQL Server connection on the System DSN &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;button. From there, the set up is exactly the same as if installing scanners. See steps 13-20 [http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Install_Desktop HERE] if you need a refresher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3: Each tab, except for tab (3) has sources that need to be matched up to our new tables. Important note - the &amp;quot;Tables&amp;quot; drop down is NOT in alphabetical order. You have to find the tables exactly as they are shown in the screenshot (ex. &amp;quot;ams_orderin&amp;quot;). There are other tables that look similar to this but are not correct. To begin the match up, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
* On the System DSN for Import Data drop down, choose the database (probably &amp;quot;adjutant&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* For the User ID and Password for Import Data, enter the database credentials you used to make the ODBC connection&lt;br /&gt;
* Hit Connect at the bottom. The grayed out drop down fields should become available to select now. &lt;br /&gt;
* For each &amp;quot;Source&amp;quot; row, select the matching Table. The table will always have an &amp;quot;ams_&amp;quot; before it. On tab Import(1), each table has &amp;quot;in&amp;quot; appended to it (ex. ams_orderin, ams_bundlein, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
* Hit disconnect and Apply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Eclipse t1.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 4: Repeat the steps above for tab Export Local (2) and Verify Coil (4). On the Verify Coil tab, you will select the AMS_Stock_WhseName table to use, and make sure that &amp;quot;Verify Coil data from SQL Server Tables&amp;quot; is checked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Eclipse t2.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Eclipse t4.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 5: Close the SQLSetup program and run the Eclipse program. In one of the menus there should be a way to connect to a source database (screenshots unavailable). It should be able to connect without stalling out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several set up options are available, depending on how Adjutant and Eclipse will be used together. Certain things need to be considered, such as bundling, scrapping and label printing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are several important options related to AMS. Not all are required - required options will say &amp;quot;(REQ)&amp;quot; next to the option. This list is not extensive. There are many more that are specific to certain customers and not relevant to a normal set up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* AMS (REQ) - turns the whole thing on. &lt;br /&gt;
* AMSASSEMPWO (REQ) - enables the logic to auto assemble and complete work orders coming from AMS.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSPRODSQL (REQ) - enables SQL transfer for production information.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSORDERSQL (REQ) - enables SQL transfer for sending orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSSQLLEN (REQ) - sends items to the machine based on bundle# and length (longest to shortest)&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSCTAG - will print bundle tags for bundles created when they are sent to AMS. This will use the AMSPRINTER rule set up previously to determine which printer is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSLABEL - &lt;br /&gt;
* SUBSTOAMS - will allow subassemblies to be sent to AMS during the S2P process.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSANYCOIL - will allow Adjutant to accept and use whatever coil is scanned through AMS regardless of production plant. &lt;br /&gt;
* AMSADDCOIL - when set, adjusts coil in Adjutant to meet AMS demand.&lt;br /&gt;
* AMSSKIPBUNDLE - will skip the bundle process during the S2P. Orders will be manually bundles using the scanner. &lt;br /&gt;
* AMSSCRAP - will enable the AMS Scrapping process. This will need the AMSSCRAP rule set up previously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coil Table Population==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin testing, you will need to run the Purge and Reload Controller Coils process in order to populate the AMS stock table with the current inventory. This will take all the open coils for the selected warehouse, remove and re-add them so they can be processed into the AMS_Stock_WhseName table. For most customers, this should take 10 minutes or less, but it should be run outside of business hours because it does lock the itemtrack table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed, run &amp;quot;Select * From ams_stock_WhseName&amp;quot; to verify that the coils are in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AMS Wiki Purge Coil.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ready to Test==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Eclipse is ready and connected, flipping on the setup options and running the AdjAmsProcess will make the integration live.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AdjAMSProcess.exe is the process used to push data back and forth. Make sure you have the latest version from the FTP folder. Run it in a local session to test for errors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to test is to take an order with an item having the Adj AMS attribute and send it to production. The line should appear in the amsorder table (select top 100 * from amsorder). The amsorder.datesent field should get filled out as the AMS process pushes it to the Eclipse database table, ams_orderin. Once it processes from there, have your customer verify they can see it in Eclipse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When coil is scanned from the Eclipse/AMS machine, it should verify from the Adjutant coil tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracking return usage is more difficult since this can only be done as the machine actually does the production. With your customer, settle on an order being run and track it through in the amsproduct table. If it shows in that table, verify the PWO has usage assigned and is completed. The amsproduct table should have the coil that was scanned in the amsproduct.coilmat field. If you find &amp;quot;NO COIL MATCH&amp;quot;, it was not able to find the coil. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If nothing is coming back, turn off the services, and go back to the start to make sure the right set up options and tables are matched correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are confident that everything is set up correctly, send an email to support to set up AdjAMSProcess as a service if they are hosted. Otherwise, set up AdjAMSProcess in the customers&amp;#039; Service + in their system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q: What if the customer says they completed the job in AMS but a carton tag didn’t print?&lt;br /&gt;
A:  Look at the amsproduct table where orderno= the SO#.  When the bundle # changes a tag should have been printed.  Look at procdate and compare that to labelmast for that same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q: What if the SQL tables are connected but Eclipse is not able to find the coil, even though it&amp;#039;s in the table?&lt;br /&gt;
A: Verify the xlwin.ini file in the Customer&amp;#039;s Eclipse folder. Close Eclipse and the COMM program. Open xlwin.ini using notepad. Verify the following are set to &amp;quot;T&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ImportSQLServer = T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ExportSQLServer = T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CoilSQLServer = T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they are &amp;quot;F&amp;quot;, change them to a &amp;quot;T&amp;quot; and save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helpful Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If all else fails, and you need to get AMS involved, Finn O&amp;#039;Mahoney is the best contact at the company. He has always been able to answer questions quickly and has helped to resolve any issues we&amp;#039;ve dealt with in the past. Finn O&amp;#039;Mahony &amp;lt;fomahony@amscontrols.com&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Integrations]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Setup Guides]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Modification_Processing&amp;diff=5932</id>
		<title>Modification Processing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Modification_Processing&amp;diff=5932"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:39:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Item Control &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Modification Processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  ModProcessing_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Modification Processor (or &amp;quot;Coil Processor&amp;quot;) is used to associate processing costs back to an item and to create new items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Modification Processor can also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Create new items from existing stock items&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer new inventory items from one warehouse to another&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Print new coil tags for new coils&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatically generate new lot numbers for new inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow you to fix mistakes that were made when receiving a lot controlled item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Items used in Mod Processor are processed just like an adjustment.  The GL accounts affected are the item&amp;#039;s control account, and ic clearing account. The inputs are adjusted out of inventory and the outputs are adjusted back in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Mod_Processing_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Document_Vault_Security_Update&amp;diff=5931</id>
		<title>Document Vault Security Update</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Document_Vault_Security_Update&amp;diff=5931"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:38:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Document Vault Security Update&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  DVaultSec&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Document Vault Security Update screen allows for defining specialized control over Document Vaulst tied to specific Organizations or specific individual records, such as a specific AP Invoice&amp;#039;s Document Vault records. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen uses special logic to limit the Document Vault access to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ONLY THOSE USERS SPECIFIED IN THE SCREEN&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and will automatically deny access to the same record(s) for all other users that are not listed. For example, setting user &amp;#039;JDOEXX&amp;#039; as allowed for Organization &amp;#039;AAA001&amp;#039; will mean that all other users that are not listed in the screen will be denied access to the Organization Document Vault for &amp;#039;AAA001&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Document_Vault_Security_Update_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_______________________________________&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a new security control===&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the desired DocVault Name that you wish to create a specific security control for. The current options are &amp;#039;AP Invoices&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;Organizations&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the Type of either &amp;#039;Organization&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;Document/Single Item&amp;#039;. Organization will limit access to a specified Organization (ENT) and the Document/Single Item selection will allow for limiting to a specific AP Invoice number. There is no Document/Single Item selection for the Organization DocVault. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select either the Organization Customer Number or the specific record document number in the Target Value field. The Target Keyno value will fill in with the appropriate database keyno value from the database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;4.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the user(s) from the UserID grid list by checking the &amp;#039;Select&amp;#039; box next to the user(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;5.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;button once once all selections are complete to create the security override. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Previously defined security overrides can be deleted from the table by selecting the &amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039; trash can icon in the right side grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Inventory_vs_GL_Dump_Accounts_-_INVDUMP_Rule&amp;diff=5930</id>
		<title>Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts - INVDUMP Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Inventory_vs_GL_Dump_Accounts_-_INVDUMP_Rule&amp;diff=5930"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:37:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Inventory vs. GL Dump Accounts rule controls which general ledger accounts are included in the overnight inventory reporting and reconciliation features, commonly referred to as the Nite Inventory process. Each GL account set up in this rule will be processed nightly, and will have account balances and transaction details stored in the data tables used for the Nite Inventory and Nite Usage reports. This rule controls which accounts have transaction vs. GL comparison data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nite Inventory process is designed to record historical data overnight each and every night to improve historical research and reconciliation activities when inventory, accounts receivable, or accounts payable GL balances get out of balance with the transaction data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule | GL Accts for Inventory - INVGLACCTS Rule]] must also be set up with the same GL accounts as this rule in order for the Nite Inventory processes to work properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [^PRINTNITEINV|Nite Inventory process] is a system service that must be set up by ABIS personnel in order to start tracking nightly inventory and GL reconciliation data. Contact your ABIS consultant if you want the Nite Inventory process set up and running. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: INVDUMP_Rule_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Text Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account (text1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the general ledger (GL) accounts that should be processed as part of the Nite Inventory reporting. For each GL account entered, the Warehouse (Whse) name and the Type must be specified. The Acct? (log1) checkbox must also be checked to flag the rule entry as a GL account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Inventory tracking, a single stock inventory account should be entered for each warehouse. The overnight reporting assumes a single stock inventory GL per warehouse. Non-stock, consignment, or other custom inventory GL accounts should not be added to this rule. It is designed for tracking stock inventory movement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For AR and AP tracking, enter each appropriate account and specify the Type value of AR or AP to track and report GL balance comparison data nightly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Whse Name (text2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The warehouse name should be entered for each GL account entered. For customers operating in a single warehouse environment, this can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email Address (text3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter email addresses that should receive the Nite Inventory reports as soon as they are processed. Each email address entered must have the Email? (log2) checkbox checked to flag the entry as an email setting rather than a GL account. Multiple email addresses can be entered as separate entries with the Email? box checked for each entry. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type (AR, AP, INV) (text4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Each GL account entry must have the Type specified as either INV (Inventory), AR (Accounts Receivable), or AP (Accounts Payable). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Number Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Number Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Logic Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Acct? (log1):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This designates a rule entry as a GL account entry. Check this box for each GL added to the rule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email? (log2):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This designates a rule entry as an email address entry. Check this box for each email address added to the rule.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Batch after mid (log3):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This should be checked for each account in environments where the nightly autobatch and posting happen after midnight. The default Nite Inventory logic processes before midnight and assumes the same day&amp;#039;s transactions and GL postings have happened before midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inv before mid (log4):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This field works with the &amp;#039;Batch after mid&amp;#039; field and should only be checked if advised by ABIS personnel. Unchecked is the most common setting for this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Payable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: General Ledger]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Print_Invoices&amp;diff=5929</id>
		<title>Print Invoices</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Print_Invoices&amp;diff=5929"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:36:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Print Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PRINTINVOICESNEW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Print/Email/Fax/EDI Customer Invoice(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Print_AR_Invoices_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields and Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Numbers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Enter a single invoice number or a range of numbers. A range can be entered by using a colon and several specific invoices can be entered by using commas. &lt;br /&gt;
For example: 100,103,105:108 will print invoice number 100, 103, 105, 106, 107, and 108.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All Unprinted:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box to print ALL invoices that have not yet been printed/processed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Checking this box will make the program ignore the invoice number range.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to print All invoices.  This is useful if you wish to print all unpaid invoices or all invoices for a particular customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Checking this box will make the program ignore the invoice number range.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter a customer ID if you wish to print invoices for one customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto-Process Code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Filter by customers&amp;#039; Auto-Process (printemail/fax/EDI) setting. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unpaid Only: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to exclude invoices that have been paid in full.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Exclude Zero Dollar Lines: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to exclude all $0 lines on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use Billing Notes: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to display the Billing Notes on the invoice (for use with Time Billing invoices only).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show Accounting Balance: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to display the current invoice balance.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Monthly Billing Clients:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box to print invoices for customers who receive their billing periodically (requires a MONTHLYBILLING attribute on the Organization).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sort By Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box to sort invoices by customer when printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show Hidden Lines&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Shows all lines on invoice (ignores the Hide Line flag). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group by Invoice #: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to group the invoices by number when printing more than one copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Only: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to bypass the Message Control Screen and go directly to Printer selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fire Printer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This button will prompt you one time for the printer to use, then print all of the invoices matching your criteria to that printer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Process: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to utilize the auto-processing function in Adjutant.  The auto-email/fax/print attributes on the Organization record determine how the invoices are processed. Invoices are printed to the default workstation printer if a customer has none of these attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;All to PDF: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to select a folder and save the invoice, or range of invoices to a folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Message_Control&amp;diff=5928</id>
		<title>Message Control</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Message_Control&amp;diff=5928"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:35:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Message Control screen is accessible when printing any form or report in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Message Control screen allows users to send emails, faxes, attach documents, preview reports, print, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Message_Control_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To customize a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create New:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create a new report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Preview:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Preview an existing report (Must choose a report from drop down menu)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To print a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To email a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fax:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To fax a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To save a copy of the form/report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Attach:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To attach a file to the email/fax you&amp;#039;re sending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Attach Linked:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  To attach any files that are linked to the form via the document vault&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Raw XLS Export List:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This button will bring up a screen which allows the user to pick which fields to export into EXCEL when exporting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Make Follow Up:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Check this box to create an open note for yourself with the contents of your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;BCC Self&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This will automatically send a copy of the email to user who is sending the email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMTPLog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This will create a log of the session (used for troubleshooting email issues).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Single Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This will send one email with all the To:’s in the address line, unchecked will send one email to Each To:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;High Prioity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option sets the high priority flag on the email (makes the ! show up in outlook).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sizable Preview&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will makes the preview open in  window than can moved around and resized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Drilldown Mode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will make the report open as HTML document (if using the PREVIEW function to view).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Old Report Engine&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option is used by internal developers (not end users).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GhostScript PDF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will prompt the system to use a different PDF engine  (user will get much better PDFs, but process takes longer, and requires some setup).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PlainText&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option sends the body in plaintext instead of HTML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FormatXLS Dump&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If exporting document or report to Excel, use this button to format fields picked in the RAW XLS Export List (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export all fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will trigger system to ignore the &amp;#039;fields to export&amp;#039; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Fields Export&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option exports the user&amp;#039;s list of fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Nite_Inventory_Reports&amp;diff=5927</id>
		<title>Nite Inventory Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Nite_Inventory_Reports&amp;diff=5927"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:34:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nite Inventory process is a nightly dump of inventory and general ledger information that can be used to research historical inventory values, inventory usage, and GL Balances on a given day in history. This allows users or consultants to generate a snapshot of the data as it was that night. This archived historical data can be useful in case of audits or researching reconciliation for inventory accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nite Inventory process is a system service that must be set up by ABIS personnel to start tracking nightly inventory and GL reconciliation data. Contact your ABIS consultant if you want the Nite Inventory process set up and running. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup Required===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two rules that must be set up to generate the data used in the Nite Inventory process. Both rules should be set up with the same GL accounts for the Nite Inventory process to work as expected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[GL Accts for Inventory - INGLACCTS Rule]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; controls the GL accounts that are processed in the nightly dump of data stored during the Nite Inventory process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Inventory vs GL Dump Accounts - INVDUMP Rule]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; controls which GL accounts are included in the comparison reporting data for transaction vs. general ledger reconciliation. This rule also contains the settings for who gets the reports emailed nightly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In addition to the two rules above, the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[CID Setup Options|AUTOBATCH]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Setup Option must be enabled and daily/nightly batching and posting must be configured in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Auto Batch Options - AUTOBATCH Rule]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The Auto Batch process has to also be scheduled in the Auto Process Schedule.  (If the customer doesn&amp;#039;t want to schedule their batches to run automatically the RUNNITEBALSEP setup option can be used instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The ADJITEMDETUPSRV system service must be set up and running. This is an ABIS-ONLY setup and must be coordinated with an ABIS consultant. &lt;br /&gt;
**The timing of when the Nite Inventory process runs can be customized with the niteusageoffset.txt file found in the Adjutant folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nite Inventory process generates data in system database tables, Excel files, and PDF reports that are saved (and optionally emailed) on a nightly basis. There are three reporting screens available for users and/or consultants to recreate the reporting data for historical dates. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Nite Inventory vs GL Summary (PRINTNITEINV)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This report compares the inventory movement in quantity and cost for each day using data from the Nite Process datatables. Differences from the nite inventory (NITEINV)table from day to day are compared to the nite usage (NITEUSAGE) values for the same period. Any differences are shown and totaled in the difference column. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The report also contains a section comparing the days on hand inventory value compared to the general ledger value for the same day. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Nite_Inv_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Date / End Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a date range to pull historical data stored in the system database tables during the Nite Inventory process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Exclude Inv Diffs:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Checking this box will suppress the inventory differences section from printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Exclude Cost Divs:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Checking this box will filter out certain item-level details based on quantity and cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;+/- Value Filter:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter a whole dollar amount to filter the results based to only include details where the cost difference exceeds the entered value. For example, entering &amp;#039;1&amp;#039; will limit the report to showing items where the overall cost difference is equal to or greater than $1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Nite Inv Report (DUMPNITEINV)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This report will show data from the NITEINV table of the on hand quantities and values at the end of the day entered in the Date Field. The NITEINV data is populated during the Nite Inventory process. For this reason, the data is purely historical and is not affected by any backdated transactions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nitinv.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A date entry is required to produce the report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Nite Usage Report (DUMPNITEUSAGE)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This report will show usage quantity and cost data from the NITEUSAGE table for the date range provided. The NITEUSAGE data is a custom data set based on the ITEMACT transaction data that drives the general ledger posting. The NITEUSAGE data is populated during the Nite Inventory process. For this reason, the data is purely historical and is not affected by any backdated transactions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Nite_Usage_Report.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Date / End Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A start and end date range is required to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Datatables in the Nite Inventory Process===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITEINV:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table contains the nightly dump of inventory on hand values for every item with on hand value. The adddate is used for the Nite Inventory Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITEUSAGE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table contains a custom nightly dump version of the ITEMACT data that is used to generate accounting details. This data is useful for comparing to general ledger data. The adddate is used for the Nite Usage Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITEDIFF:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table records any net change in quantity and/or value for each item from night to night. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NITEBAL:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This table captures GL balances from the accounts in the INVDUMP and INVGLACCTS nightly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Accounts Payable]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Accounts Receivable]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Item Control]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Excel_BOM_Import&amp;diff=5926</id>
		<title>Excel BOM Import</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Excel_BOM_Import&amp;diff=5926"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:34:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Importers/Exporters &amp;gt;&amp;gt; MBS/QuestWare Integration &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Excel BOM Import/BOM to Excel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: mbsgrid_s.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step By Step Guide For Metal Building Creation (MBS to Adjutant)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create Project for the Building using the Project Screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Create Sales Order from the Project screen for the building order by using the create SO button on the right side of the screen [[File:New_SO_button.png]] This sales order will have one line item. Line item will be &amp;quot;Metal Building&amp;quot; (additional line item with freight).  Once added on the Sales Order, system will ask configuration questions for the building (sizes, footage, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MBS_NEW_SO.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre style=&amp;quot;color: red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 *NOTE Do not enter any costs on this Sales Order (cost will come from the BOM Sales Order, which is discussed below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Open up the [http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=MBS_to_Excel BOM TO EXCEL] screen in Adjutant: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRANSACTION --&amp;gt; IMPORTERS/EXPORTERS --&amp;gt; MBS QUESTWARE INTEGRATION --&amp;gt; BOM TO EXCEL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;4.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click on the option &amp;quot;Select Existing BOM_SHP.INI file&amp;quot;.   This is the file which has been created from MBS (have this file saved either inside the doc vault for the project or on your desktop)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;5.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the Sales Order # (the one created in step 2) in the &amp;#039;Job Number&amp;#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;6.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click on the button next to the &amp;#039;Select File&amp;#039; box at the bottom of the screen in order to open select the appropriate MBS file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;7.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Once file has been selected, click the &amp;quot;Excel&amp;#039; button (Adjutant will begin creating Excel file).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MBS_to_excel_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;8.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Once the file has been generated, user can go into the file and make any edits to the BOM necessary. Save file on desktop or within the appropriate Project Document Vault, and CLOSE THE FILE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre style=&amp;quot;color: red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE The Excel file must be saved as a XLXS type.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;9.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Open the [[Excel BOM Import]] screen &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TRANSACTION --&amp;gt; IMPORTERS/EXPORTERS --&amp;gt; MBS QUESTWARE INTEGRATION --&amp;gt; BOM EXCEL FILE IMPORT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in all corresponding information (Sales Order, Project, etc), then click the &amp;#039;Process&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:MBSBOMexport2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;10.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Use the &amp;#039;BOM-Item Master Match Up&amp;#039; screen in order to map item codes from MBS to the item codes in Adjutant.  Items with existing cross references are displayed in Green, unmatched items are Red/Pink. Selecting the green disk saves the cross references made during the session. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:MBSMatchup2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both item code(Adjutant) and item description(Adjutant) are searchable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;11.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Once all items have been matched, click the BLUE save disk in the upper right hand corner. The GREEN save button allows you to save current matchups if user cannot finish the process in one session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;12.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Upon saving, Adjutant will then create a BOM Sales Order that matches the existing Sales Order (created in step 2).  The order will have the prefix &amp;#039;BOM&amp;#039;.  This order is the order which the user will send to production.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE Adjutant will ask if user wishes to load pricing.  Select &amp;#039;NO&amp;#039; (prices will default to &amp;#039;0&amp;#039; on BOM order to eliminate possibility of &amp;#039;double invoicing&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;13.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Once production has been completed, ship(invoice) both orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spreadsheet Format===&lt;br /&gt;
The spreadsheet should be formatted as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two worksheets, with the item list starting on Sheet2. Sheet1 can be left blank or act as a title page. Additional sheets after sheet2 can also contain items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The item list must start on Row 13. Column headers are not required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column A = Qty (Make sure the column header for this is &amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;. If the column header is something else - &amp;#039;Qty&amp;#039;, for example -- Adjutant will try to import the column headers onto the sales order.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column B = Piece Mark (SOC Report Code = A)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column C = Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column D = Color Name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column E = Drawing (not used in import)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column F = Length in Ft-In (not used in import). If ROOFSLOPE is active then the roof slope can be entered into this column (will be mapped to any configuration question where the report code = &amp;#039;S&amp;#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column G = Cut Length in Ft-In (not used in import). If MBSWT is enabled, the value from column G is imported as the weight for that line. If MBSTOTWT is active, the value from column G is divided by the number of pieces to determine the weight of the individual pieces. In other words, the weight on the import is treated as an extended weight. (The weight can be saved as the answer to a configuration question if the report code = &amp;#039;W&amp;#039;.) If MBSTOTWT is active then MBSWT needs to be active as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column H = Punch Pattern (separate your leading and trailing punch with a dash; e.g. A-A)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column I = Length in Decimal Inches (this is converted to ft-inch length and stuffed into SOC Report Code = B)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column J = Class&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column K = Part&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column L = Thickness/Gauge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column M = Color Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columns J, K, L, and M are not required, but will speed up the import process if filled out. See the &amp;quot;Matching Logic&amp;quot; section for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Item Control]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Delivery_Route_Master&amp;diff=5925</id>
		<title>Delivery Route Master</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Delivery_Route_Master&amp;diff=5925"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:04:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Shipping &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Delivery Route Master&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; DROUTEH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Delivery Route Master is used to generate shipping events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Delivery_Route_Master.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create shipping route templates with &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Route Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039; by entering time restraints, location and type of route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Time loading the shipment starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cutoff Time/Cutoff Day Offset&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sets the deadline of when an order can be added to a shipping event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Shipping Event Type defined by a rule called SE Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Whse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Warehouse that shipping event leaves from&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Days Run&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sets the days each week the event will take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How-TO Add shipping events====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Method 1-By County&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Counties Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the counties desired on that route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add counties to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Counties&amp;#039;&amp;#039; list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Press the Process &amp;#039;&amp;#039;ShipTOs&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Shipping_by_County.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Method 2- By Organization&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open the [^ENT|Organization&amp;#039;s] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;ShipTo&amp;#039;&amp;#039; attribute to bring up the ShipTO Information page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the bottom right of the Information screen select the desired shipping route for the Organization&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Save ShipTo Information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[imageauto|Add Shipping by Organization|{UP}/Organization embedded.png|^shipto-route]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ShipTos Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of the shipping events that have be added to the shipping route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Route Generator Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows for shipping events to be created in advance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Counties Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Predetermined counties and territories can be linked to a delivery route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Shipping]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Purchase_Order_PDF_Attachments_-_POPDF_Rule&amp;diff=5924</id>
		<title>Purchase Order PDF Attachments - POPDF Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Purchase_Order_PDF_Attachments_-_POPDF_Rule&amp;diff=5924"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:02:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; RuleMain_S.htm?rulename=POPDF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This rule sets the paths for the PDFs that are able to be selected from the &amp;quot;PDF Button&amp;quot; on the purchase order screen, as well as some defaulting logic.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[image:popdfrule.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Text Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File Name:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The name of the PDF file, including the .pdf extention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Full Path:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The entire folder path to where the PDF is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Attribute or Term:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This field has two purposes. 1. This can be an item attribute that will check the PDF box on the purchase order. The attributes will always start with a &amp;quot;DL_&amp;quot; prefix. Please note that a corresponding item attribute will need to be created in the Item Attributes rule. OR 2. This can be a term that links to Text 3 of the Terms rule that will pull in the PDF if that terms is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custno:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The customer ID number that determines which PDF to pull in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Number Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;No Number Fields In Use&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Logic Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PreCheck:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This will automatically set the corresponding PDF to be checked by default on the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Purchasing]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Print_Purchase_Order_Labels&amp;diff=5923</id>
		<title>Print Purchase Order Labels</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Print_Purchase_Order_Labels&amp;diff=5923"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:02:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Purchase Order &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Purchase Order Labels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PoLabel_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Purchase Order label screen allows the printing of items on a purchase order onto labels.  Select the labels to be printed by checking them off.  All or none can be selected and the system will automatically check off all items or uncheck all items.  Labels to skip determines the position to begin printing the labels on.  Label Printer or Laser printer can be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:printpolabels.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Purchasing]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Screen_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5922</id>
		<title>Screen Setup Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Screen_Setup_Options&amp;diff=5922"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:00:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Setup Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window is called from the Info button on the Forum/Info/Wiki screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It displays system and security information about a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add Security for Users===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator may use this tab to update security rights related to the screen for multiple users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grid on the left side of the screen lists all of the Security Rights applicable to the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grid on the right side of the screen lists all of the Users in your system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update User security rights by checking the applicable boxes on both grids and clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security-NEW tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is similar to the tab above in that it also allows an administrator to update security rights related to the screen for multiple users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all users in Adjutant (listed in the &amp;quot;FullName&amp;quot; column) and admin can allow user/users to View/Edit/Add/Deny as it pertains to the current screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: User_Security_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Security_Setup_Options_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab displays all of the CID Setup Options applicable to the screen.  Currently enabled setup options are checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator may enable or disable setup options by checking/unchecking the box next to each setup option and clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rules===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Security_Rules_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab displays all of the Rules that are applicable to the screen.  You can double-click a Rule Name to view that rule in the Rule Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Labels===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Security_Labels_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab displays the editable Label Captions (aka field name) on the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change any of the Label Captions by editing the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assigned Users===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Assigned_Users_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab displays the Users who have security to the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can remove a user&amp;#039;s security rights by unchecking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assigned &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;box and clicking the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Invoice_Register_Report&amp;diff=5921</id>
		<title>Invoice Register Report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Invoice_Register_Report&amp;diff=5921"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T16:00:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Accounts Receivable &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Invoice Register&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Shot:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; INVOICEREGISTERREPORT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This screen generates Invoice Register Report with the Order Number, Invoice Date, and the Invoice Amount for all the customers by a specific time frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Invoice_Register_Report_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cust#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Customer ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Starting Invoice Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;End Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Ending Invoice Date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Terr:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Customer Territory (on SOLDTO screen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Status:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Invoice Status (viewable on the Invoice Header).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Sales Order Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices with multiple SO Types may not be displayed correctly if this filter is used.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sort By:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The report can be generated by -- &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice #, Customer Number, Customer Name, SO#, SP.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Summary or Detail:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Choose the type of report to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show GLDist:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check the box for GL distribution list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Report Fields(Header)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every customer&amp;#039;s report is different.  Here are some general Headings for a report.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* lc_company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* lc_report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* lc_date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Report Fields(Line Items)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice/Order:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The invoice number and the order number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* alltrim(invno)+&amp;quot;/&amp;quot;altrim(orderno)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inv Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The date invoice was generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ttod(invdate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cust#:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The customer number for the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* custno&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The company name for the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Net Amount:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The net amount of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* subamt-disamt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Tax:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The sales tax for the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* taxamt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Total:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The total amount for the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* totamt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The total balance of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* balance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Accounts Receivable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments_-_GLSEGMENTS_Rule&amp;diff=5920</id>
		<title>GL Segments - GLSEGMENTS Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments_-_GLSEGMENTS_Rule&amp;diff=5920"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:59:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Profile GL Segments rule allows users to designate specific codes for groups used in the [[Financial Report Writer]] screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GL_Segments_Rule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Text Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  These are the names of the [[GL Segments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is the description of the segment selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Number Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Section&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a numeric identifier for the GL Segment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Logic Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;There are no Logic fields in use.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments_-_GLSEGMENTS_Rule&amp;diff=5919</id>
		<title>GL Segments - GLSEGMENTS Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments_-_GLSEGMENTS_Rule&amp;diff=5919"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:59:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Profile GL Segments rule allows users to designate specific codes for groups used in the [[Financial Report Writer]] screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GL_Segments_Rule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Text Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  These are the names of the [[GL Segments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is the description of the segment selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Number Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Section&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a numeric identifier for the GL Segment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Logic Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;There are no Logic fields in use.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments&amp;diff=5918</id>
		<title>GL Segments</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=GL_Segments&amp;diff=5918"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:58:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; GL Segment Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLSEGMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The GL Segment Values are used in building reports in the [[Financial Report Writer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GL_Segments.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Fields/ Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select a Segment:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is a drop down selection created using the [[GL Segments - GLSEGMENTS Rule]].  The segment is the position between the predefine mask.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Segment Value:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The value being defined in the segment of the GL Account Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A short description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Long Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A long description available to be used in the Financial Report Writer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Financial_Report_Writer&amp;diff=5917</id>
		<title>Financial Report Writer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Financial_Report_Writer&amp;diff=5917"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:58:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Reports &amp;gt;&amp;gt; General Ledger &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Financial Report Writer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; GLREPORT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Financial Report Writer has the ability to generate different reports based on GL postings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report Header Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Header.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Unique name to identify the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Heading:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The heading to print on the top of the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Footer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The footer to print on the bottom of the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sequence:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;AcctNumber&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses the account number assigned on the GL Account Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sequence:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;SeqNumber&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses the sequence number assigned on the GL Account Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;GL Account Short, GL Account Long, Segment Short, or Segment Long&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to pull the description from to display on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Display Range By:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Groups&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the blue highlighted Report Groups header to navigate to its corresponding creation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the box beside the groups that are desired to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Header_3.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Display Range By:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start/End Range&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the beginning account range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the ending account range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Rollup Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Rollup.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the blue highlighted Rollup Groups header to navigate to its corresponding creation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the box beside the groups that are desired to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Summarize====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Summarize.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comes from the [[GL Segments - GLSEGMENTS Rule]] which populates the segments screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is another type of roll up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Columns Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Columns.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Number of Columns:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Determines how many columns will be on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
Note:  Changing the number of columns will over write the existing report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Account Mask:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  A type of roll up by segment values.  This will list all related values into the first gl code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Balance:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Selection of Ending Balance, Beginning Balance, Year-to-Date or Period-to-Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Selection of Dynamic or Static Dates; Formulas or % of Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Dynamic&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is selected the options available are: This, Next, Last, Last Year and Period Offset.  The next data element selections are:  Fiscal Period, Fiscal Quarter and Fiscal Year. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Static&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is selected the year/period combination must be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Formula&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is selected a column must be selected, then the type of formula and another column.  Formulas allow adding, subtracting and dividing of columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;% of Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is selected a group defined in the Account Report Groups (from the header tab) must be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Period&amp;#039;s From/To:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection of This, Next, Last, Last Year, or Period Offset&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection of Fiscal Periods, Fiscal Qtrs, or Fiscal Year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rows Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Financial_Report_Writer_-_Rows.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sequence:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is the order in which the rows appear on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Line Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The way in which the rows appear on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This is the name of the row that appears on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:General Ledger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Update_Customer_Quote&amp;diff=5916</id>
		<title>Update Customer Quote</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Update_Customer_Quote&amp;diff=5916"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:57:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Quotes &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Customer Quotes &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Update Bids&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ORDERS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This screen is used to update a customer quote once you have received the costs back from your suppliers/vendors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Updating Quotes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use Lowest Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to use the lowest cost available for each line item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show Lowest&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to highlight the lowest quotes in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Update Quote&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to update the Customer Quote with the costs you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Quotes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Quote_Import_Mapping_-_RFQMAP1_Rule&amp;diff=5915</id>
		<title>Quote Import Mapping - RFQMAP1 Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Quote_Import_Mapping_-_RFQMAP1_Rule&amp;diff=5915"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:57:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   This rule maps column headers of the CSV format spreadsheet for importing quote lines to specific configuration questions. The &amp;#039;Import Column&amp;#039; entry in the rule must EXACTLY match the column heading in the spreadsheet in order to import. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Quote_Import_Mapping_Screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rule Setup – Text Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Import Column (text1, char, 50):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the column heading as it displays on the spreadsheet you&amp;#039;re using for the import.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SOC Report Code (text2, char, 10):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the report code of the matched item&amp;#039;s configuration question that the column&amp;#039;s value should update. The following report codes are hardcoded since they relate to fields on the Customer Quote screen (instead of configuration questions):  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRICE&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This maps to the Sell Price field on the Line Items tab; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SHIPWHSE&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Transfers to the Ship Warehouse field on the Line Items tab;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PLANT&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Transfers to the Plant field on the Line Items tab;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PRODNOTES&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Transfers to the Production section of the line item notes;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DESCRIP&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Overrides the item description on the Line Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Quotes]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Rule Maintenance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=UDFs/Forms/Decision_Trees&amp;diff=5914</id>
		<title>UDFs/Forms/Decision Trees</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=UDFs/Forms/Decision_Trees&amp;diff=5914"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:55:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Routing&amp;gt;&amp;gt; UDFs/Forms/Decision Trees&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; TASKQALL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UDF.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Defined Fields====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Field:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The name of the question to ask the user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This is the type of answer field. You may choose from Lists, text, numbers, dates, multi-lists (for lists that will contain more than one answer), etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Min Value:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A defined minimum numeric value for the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Max Value:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A defined maximum numeric parameter for the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Min Length:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A defined minimum character length for the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Max Length:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; A defined maximum character length for the answer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DecQty:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calculation:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Action Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;QLong:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Check Boxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Skip Ans 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Common Question:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  This will update the answers for all other copies of this question that are linked to the same object.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proj Question:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Will update answers for copies of this same question across multiple tasks if they are tied to the same project.  &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Optional&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Forms Tab====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Form Name:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This is the name given to the form&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Decision Trees Tab====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Task Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Project Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Quick_Search&amp;diff=5913</id>
		<title>Quick Search</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Quick_Search&amp;diff=5913"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:54:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Search feature is located at the end of the Adjutant toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It allows you to quickly find different records in Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can search by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* AP Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
* Asset&lt;br /&gt;
* Bid&lt;br /&gt;
* Campaign&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact&lt;br /&gt;
* GL Account&lt;br /&gt;
* Item Code&lt;br /&gt;
* Note&lt;br /&gt;
* Opportunity&lt;br /&gt;
* Organization&lt;br /&gt;
* Project Name&lt;br /&gt;
* Project Opportunity&lt;br /&gt;
* Purchase Order&lt;br /&gt;
* Quote&lt;br /&gt;
* Sales Order&lt;br /&gt;
* Screen Name&lt;br /&gt;
* Serial/Lot&lt;br /&gt;
* Shipping Event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each search will take you to the corresponding screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search.png|options|caption]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Printer_Control_and_PWO_Printer_Control&amp;diff=5912</id>
		<title>Printer Control and PWO Printer Control</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Printer_Control_and_PWO_Printer_Control&amp;diff=5912"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:54:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Printer Control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PRINTCON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;20/20 URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  PrinterControl_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Each networked label printer must be set up in the Printer Control screen of Adjutant.  Adjutant will not properly communicate with the printer without it being set up in this screen first. Laser Printers used in auto-processing Production Work Orders and laser form labels must also be set up here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Printer_Control_Master_Tab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Master===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Short Name must be a number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The UNC Name is the name of the printer as it is listed on the network (\\domainname\printername).&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be listed as an IP Address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If labels are being FTP&amp;#039;d to the printer, then check the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FTP to Printer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; box. The User ID and Password are only required if the printer has been setup to require them. The FTP batch size allows you to limit the number of labels sent in any one file to the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scale Factor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field should be set to 1 for printers using a 203 dpi setting. All other printers should be scaled according to that setting. For example, a printer using 300 dpi should have a scale factor of 1.478.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===PWO Control===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set up default printers for specific plants and printers in the PWO Control tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the printer you want to add in the bottom grid and choose &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Plant and Department from the drop-down fields and then click the Add PWO Button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Printpworeport Print Production Work Order] screen will direct each PWO to the corresponding printer based on the setup here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Printer_Control_PWO_Control_Tab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The UNC Name for any printer that is connected directly to a terminal must be LOCAL.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Production]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Microsoft_Teams_Web_Hooks_-_TEAMSHOOK_Rule&amp;diff=5911</id>
		<title>Microsoft Teams Web Hooks - TEAMSHOOK Rule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Microsoft_Teams_Web_Hooks_-_TEAMSHOOK_Rule&amp;diff=5911"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:53:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The MS Teams Webhook (TEAMSHOOK) rule controls the integration between Adjutant 20/20 and the Microsoft Teams Chat/Messaging platform. Webhook names must be custom developed by ABIS to provide specific integrations. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams_Web_Hooks.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Text Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hook Name (max 50):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Adjutant to Teams wehooks are custom developed. The hook name entered here points to a set of programming logic tied to the name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adj 20/20 URL (max 99):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the base URL and screen for the related webhook integration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Teams URL Part 1 (max 99):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The incoming Teams hook URL requires three parts. This is part 1 of the full URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Teams URL Part 2 (max 99):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The incoming Teams hook URL requires three parts. This is part 2 of the full URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Teams URL Part 3 (max 99):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The incoming Teams hook URL requires three parts. This is part 3 of the full URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Number Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are no number fields in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Logic Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Active:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Checking this box marks the integration as active. Unchecking disables the integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Rule Maintenance]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Microsoft_Teams_Task_Xref_-_TEAMSTASK&amp;diff=5910</id>
		<title>Microsoft Teams Task Xref - TEAMSTASK</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Microsoft_Teams_Task_Xref_-_TEAMSTASK&amp;diff=5910"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:53:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Rule Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The MS Teams Task Xref (TEAMSTASK) rule controls the integration between Adjutant Task Management and the Microsoft Teams Chat/Messaging platform. Standard Task codes are linked to MS Teams channel codes with message text for the Teams postings. The rule also specifies when the integration takes place according to the tasks creation or completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams_Task_Xref.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Headline text ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Text Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Task (max 50):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the Standard Task code that should create a message in the Teams app. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;TEAMCODE (max 50):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the Teams channel code that the message should post to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Teams Message (max 50):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the message subject for the Teams channel message. The generated Teams message contains additional details from the task, such as customer and ticket number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status (2 char):&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Enter the status, either &amp;#039;CO&amp;#039; for Complete, or &amp;#039;CR&amp;#039; for Create that should send the message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Number Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are no number fields in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule Setup – Logic Fields===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Active:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  Checking this box marks the integration message as active. Unchecking disables the integration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Rule Maintenance]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Task Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=End_User_Update_Tool&amp;diff=5909</id>
		<title>End User Update Tool</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=End_User_Update_Tool&amp;diff=5909"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:53:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; End User Update Tool&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Update_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  The Adjutant End User Update Tool allows you to update your Adjutant installation with the latest available version of the software. New versions contain bug fixes, enhancements, customizations, and new developments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:End_User_Update_Tool.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Open End User Update Tool screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have this menu option, you can add it in the [[Menu Prompts]] screen.  The screen name is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;adjautoupdate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. A correctly formatted menu prompt looks like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[image:updatemenu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Check For Update&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an update is available, the screen will list your current version number and the latest available version number.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an update is not available, the screen will say, &amp;quot;Running version is current version.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If you wish to update your version, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install Full Update&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button. The new version will be downloaded to your Adjutant folder and the Adjutant Update Processor window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;5.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;button to install the latest version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;6.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click Yes when asked to update the Help Database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;7.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disconnect and Exit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;8.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Log out of Adjutant and then log back in to run the new version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;Beta&amp;#039; option should be checked by default.  This is the correct setting for most customers.  Do not change this option unless instructed to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;Process Local File (Skip FTP) option can be used if a server is unable to connect to the ABIS FTP server for any number of reasons, or if the customer server is too slow to process the FTP transfer without timing out.  In order to use this option, the current version install package files must be manually transferred to the customer&amp;#039;s server, and placed in the Adjutant folder. The current version install package files must be provided by ABIS personnel with access to the ABIS-only ADJftp\AdjCurrentVersionBeta FTP resource folder. With the &amp;#039;Process Local File&amp;#039; option checked and the latest install package files in the Adjutant directory, follow the instructions above starting at step 3. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;#039;Passive FTP&amp;#039; option can be used if there is a security issue with the customer server attempting to transfer from the ABIS FTP.  The &amp;#039;Passive FTP&amp;#039; option uses a different method to access the ABIS FTP which usually bypasses the port blocking policies in use on the customer server. &lt;br /&gt;
** The FTPPASSIVE setup option can be enabled to automatically default the &amp;#039;Passive FTP&amp;#039; option for customers that need to use this method for updating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.abiscorp.com/adjwiki/AllPages.aspx?Cat=Release%20Notes|Adjutant Release Notes wiki pages] have release notes for every new version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Diamond_Data_Queries&amp;diff=5908</id>
		<title>Diamond Data Queries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Diamond_Data_Queries&amp;diff=5908"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:52:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Reports&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Diamond Data Queries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Diamond_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  The Diamond Data Query Tool is used to create and run SQL queries that are specific to a company&amp;#039;s business process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:diamond.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the query from the drop-down menu, fill out any required variables, and click the RUN button. Then click EXPORT to save the results to an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will process the query and display live results in the grid below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will export the answer grid to an xls file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please Note: You must fill out the variables on the right-hand side of the screen if the query requires them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Diamond:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Adds a new Diamond query&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit Diamond:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Allows user to edit Diamon query SQL statement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save RS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Saves report set for future use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Diamond_Data_Queries&amp;diff=5907</id>
		<title>Diamond Data Queries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Diamond_Data_Queries&amp;diff=5907"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:52:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Reports&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Diamond Data Queries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Diamond_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  The Diamond Data Query Tool is used to create and run SQL queries that are specific to a company&amp;#039;s business process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:diamond.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields/ Filters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the query from the drop-down menu, fill out any required variables, and click the RUN button. Then click EXPORT to save the results to an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will process the query and display live results in the grid below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Will export the answer grid to an xls file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please Note: You must fill out the variables on the right-hand side of the screen if the query requires them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Diamond:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Adds a new Diamond query&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit Diamond:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Allows user to edit Diamon query SQL statement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save RS:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Saves report set for future use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Project Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Auto_Process_Schedule&amp;diff=5906</id>
		<title>Auto Process Schedule</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Auto_Process_Schedule&amp;diff=5906"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:52:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Maintain &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Auto Process Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  AUTOSCHVIEW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Function:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; The Auto Process Schedule screen is used to set up automatic batches and report sets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Schedule.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Schedule Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Schedule shows a daily view of each report set and batch that is scheduled to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can scroll through each week by using the corresponding Previous Week and Next Week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on any Report Set record on the screen to view more details about it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click on any Report Set or Auto Batch to delete it.  You are also presented with the option to delete all future events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add Auto Batch===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To schedule an Auto Batch, select the Events tab, and then choose Auto Batch from the Priority drop-down menu. Next, enter the Start and End Dates, as well as the Time you want the batch to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should schedule the batch to run according to your report sets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if a Balance Sheet is in your report sets, then you want the batch to run before the Balance Sheet report set so that everything has been batched and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no CID filter for the Auto Batches.  Each CID must be configured to run an auto batch.  Please see the [[Auto Batch Options - AUTOBATCH Rule]] for more information.  Also, the AUTOBATCH setup option must be enabled for the batch to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Events_Auto_Batch.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add Report Set===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To schedule a Report Set, select the Events tab, and then choose Report Set from the Priority drop-down menu. Next, enter the Start and End Dates, as well as the Time you want the report set to be scheduled. Next, select the frequency (Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly) in which the report set should be posted. Next, select the specific report set(s) and CID(s) from the corresponding lists: Report Sets and CIDs. Lastly, select the &amp;quot;Add Event&amp;quot; button to schedule your Report Set(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2025-01-16_105698.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Viewing/Editing Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Double-click a Report Set to view the details of the reports, who they&amp;#039;re sent to, where they&amp;#039;re saved, etc.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_View_Report_Set_Details.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Right-Click a Report Set or Batch, then select Change Time, Change Schedule (Extend Event(s)), or Delete Event to modify it. You can reschedule and delete future events as well.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Modify.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Time.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Change Schedule (Extend Event(s))&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Change_Schedule_(Extend_Event(s)).jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete Event&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Auto_Process_Schedule_-_Delete_Event.jpeg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Workflow Routing]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Time and Materials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Project Management]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_Services&amp;diff=5905</id>
		<title>Adjutant Services</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_Services&amp;diff=5905"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:51:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjutant has some services that can be installed to offload some of the background work, and do some other processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They all are installed using a program named Service Mill that allows standard Windows EXEs to run as Windows Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service Summary===&lt;br /&gt;
Service Restart - Restarts the Service Checker every 15 minutes.  (AdjFoxRS.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Service Checker - Monitors the status of the other services and restarts as needed. (AdjFoxSrvCheck.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Event Processor - Processes Web Events, and runs other Event based processes. (Foxprocess.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note Reader - Reads an email mailbox using POP, and creates notes in Adjutant based on a set of rules.  (MailRead3.exe/MailReadPop3.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inbox Reader - Reads a email mailbox using POP, and transfers attached files to other folders based on a set of rules. (Inboxread3.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ItemDet Update Service - Offloads OHF Counter processing from the desktop version to a service. (AdjItemDetUp.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PDF Maker - Creates standard reports for the web version of Adjutant. (PDFMaker71.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Resource Time Import - Imports resources and Time entries from a External Time Clock program. (AdjResImport.exe)  (Obsolete)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Reader - Reads an email inbox, and creates support svrords based on a set of rules. (TaskReadPop3.exe/TaskRead3.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AMS Process - Handles integration with AMS/Connex Controllers  (AdjAMSProcess.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connex API Process - Reads Production Data From Connex Controller  (ReadConnexAPI.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heartland CC - Handles Credit Card Processing with Heartland Gateway  (AdjCC.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HubSpot - Handles Hubspot API integration  (HubSpotAdj.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ChipReader - Handles EMV Terminal intergration with Heartland  (ChipReader.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Label Engine - Handles printing barcode labels to Zerba printers (LabelEngineLoader.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Night Processing - Runs automated reports and GL Batching processes (AutoMainLoader.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal Control - Interfaces Worth RF terminals to WMS (termcontrolloader.exe/termcontrolsloader.exe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the services are installed the same way, using the service mill front end to install a new Service mill service&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service Install Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bring up the Service+ screen, right click on the local computer in the tree, pick ALL Tasks, Install New Service Mill Service&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name1 and Name2 come from the Short Names List&lt;br /&gt;
Name3 can be anything&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Click on Next&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen 2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the matching EXE from the Adjutant Folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the When the service Stops button, set the time to 15 seconds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Click on Next&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Screen 3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select This Account, pick an account that has local admin rights (and full access to the adjutant folders and subfolders and the dropfolders and subfolders) , enter the password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change to Startup Type to  Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Click on OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should be able to start the service at this time  (either right click and pick start, or click on it, and click the start button in the tool bar)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service Restart===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reads AdjServiceRestart.txt to get the name of Service Checker Service&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can either run under the local services account, or under a local admin level account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Service Checker===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reads serviceabis.dbf in the same folder to get the service names and Adjutant ExtLog names for the other installed services.  This table contains a list of the services to monitor.  They are checked for running status via the service manager, and the Adjutant External Log table is checked also.  If they appear to have stopped, they are restarted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event Processor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Processes events for all CIDs marked with Include in Service Process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Note Reader===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reads poptext.txt to load settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inbox Reader===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reads inboxtext.txt to load settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ItemDet Update===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to have XXXX CID option set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===PDF Maker ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to be installed in a folder other than the main Adjutant folder.  Copies of the major transaction forms need to put into the same folder, with all needed images  (INV,PO,SO,RFQ, Service Order)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resource Time Import===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS Feed Generator===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Task Reader===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reads tasktext.txt to load settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needs to run under a local admin level account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be installed in main Adjutant folder, or in separate services folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_License_Master&amp;diff=5904</id>
		<title>Adjutant License Master</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_License_Master&amp;diff=5904"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:50:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How To Access===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;URL&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  REQLIC_S.htm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Menu Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  Transaction &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Request License Update&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Function===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Request License Update screen displays your system&amp;#039;s license counts for each license type and allows authorized users to request updates to license counts. Keep in mind that certain update requests may need additional review by ABIS personnel before they can be processed. Specific contractual agreements for licensing may require minimum license counts, license bundling, or other specific licensing criteria that this screen is not designed to accommodate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Request License Update screen generates an automated system request for managing and updating license controls. This is a powerful screen that can have a direct impact on billing agreements with ABIS as well as system functionality due to lost licenses. Access to this screen should be limited to key decision makers with authority to update contractual agreements with ABIS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact your consulting or sales representative before making any changes to this screen if you have any questions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Updating a Single License Type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:reqlic2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Select the type of license you would like to update using the radio toggle on the right-hand side.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Enter the desired new license count value in the New Value field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Click the Request License button when finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===License Types===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Full Named Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Users that either have &amp;#039;Web&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;Desktop&amp;#039; licenses, or both.  If a user has both Web and Desktop, that counts as one license.  If a user has Web only that counts as one license, as does a user that has Desktop only.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;AFI Portal Named Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Users for the Adjutant Field Inspection App, an offline, tablet-based application used to perform inspections on various assets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;KPI Viewer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - KPI Viewer licenses are unique licenses that allow for specific, limited access to information displayed on web-based applications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consult your ABIS sales representative with any questions about license types and license agreements specific to your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Login_Screen&amp;diff=5903</id>
		<title>Adjutant 20/20 Login Screen</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.abiscorp.com/faq/index.php?title=Adjutant_20/20_Login_Screen&amp;diff=5903"/>
		<updated>2025-07-25T15:50:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Freddy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===General Information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:adjuloginscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the first screen you will see when opening Adjutant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your User ID and Password, then press Enter or click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Login&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Troubleshooting===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you cannot login, make sure you have typed your User ID and Password in correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you still can not log in, click &amp;quot;Clear Cookies/Storage,&amp;quot; and try again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Are you locked out? If you try to log in too many times with the wrong password, you will get locked out. Have your system administrator unlock you and reset your password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn how to properly create a new user, see the [[How To - Create A New User]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:System Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup Options]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Freddy</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>